Sing Out Loud: Using Music in the Classroom

Traditional Songs & American Rhythms

Published by the Office of English Language Programs

Bureau of Cultural and Educational Affairs
United States Department of State
Washington, DC 20037
americanenglish.state.gov / englishprograms.state.gov

First Edition 2012

 
 
  

Sing out Loud American Themes CD

Produced by John Hart, Hawai’i Pacific University

Mastered by Daniel Ho
CD design by Kim Okamura, Illustrations by Jay Ryan
Special thanks to Carlos Juarez of Hawai’i Pacific University
and all of the wonderful musicians involved.

Photo Credits:

All photos © Shutterstock, Inc. unless otherwise noted.

Page 97, Postage stamp of musical The Wizard of Oz and Judy Garland, circa 1990. © Krylova
Ksenia / Shutterstock.com
Page 119, A stamp printed in the USA shows Helen Keller & Anne Sullivan, circa 1980. © tristan
tan / Shutterstock.com
Page 119, A stamp printed in the USA showing Thomas Alva Edison, circa 1930s. © EtiAmmos /
Shutterstock.com
Page 119, A stamp printed in the USA shows Martin Luther King Jr. and civil rights marchers,
Black Heritage, circa 1979. © Neftali / Shutterstock.com
Page 120, A stamp published in the USA shows the brothers Orville and Wilbur Wright circa 1995.
© Yuriy Boyko / Shutterstock.com
Page 120, A stamp printed in the USA shows a portrait of Susan Brownell Anthony circa 1930. ©
MarkauMark / Shutterstock.com
Page 159, Mardi Gras 2010 in New Orleans. © Dustie / Shutterstock.com
Page 160, A jazz band plays in New Orleans, Louisiana after Hurricane Katrina just before the
Jazz and Heritage Festival. © Ken Durden / Shutterstock.com
Page 189, City streetlife at intersection of 5th Ave. and 60th St. near Central Park in New York
City. © Andrey Bayda / Shutterstock.com
Page 193 and Page 200, Downtown El Paso. © Frontpage / Shutterstock.com
Page 214, Salt River Rafters infielder Dixon Machado in a game against the Mesa Solar Sox at
Hohokam Park in Mesa, AZ. © Debby Wong / Shutterstock.com
Page 220 and 226, Bethany Hamilton in Rip Curl Pro 2010 in Peniche, Portugal. © Gustavo
Miguel Fernandes / Shutterstock.com
Page 226, Actor Christopher Reeve & wife Dana at the unveiling of his star on the Hollywood
Walk of Fame. Pix: Paul Smith. © Featureflash / Shutterstock.com
Page 277, 1928 Vintage Car. © Margo Harrison / Shutterstock.com

 
 
  

Table of Contents

USING SONGS IN CLASS: THE SING OUT LOUD SERIES ................................ 1

How This Book Is Organized ...............................................................................................1

PART I: GENERAL SONG ACTIVITIES ................................................................ 8

Section 1: Pre-listening Activities ........................................................................................8
Pre-listening 1: Four Corners......................................................................................9
Pre-listening 2: One Title, Several Words – Many Possibilities ..................................10
Pre-listening 3: Swat...................................................................................................11
Pre-listening 4: Stanza Creation .................................................................................12
Pre-listening 5: Unscramble the Sentences................................................................13
Pre-listening 6: Find Someone Who… .......................................................................14
Pre-listening 7: What Do You Know About…? ...........................................................16
Pre-listening 8: Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary...................................17
Pre-listening 9: Picture Predictions.............................................................................18
Pre-listening 10: Can You See What I See?.................................................................19
Pre-listening 11: It Could Be / There Might Be .............................................................20
Pre-listening 12: Picture Dictation.................................................................................22
Pre-listening 13: How Many Questions in a Minute? ....................................................23

Section 2: Listening Activities ..............................................................................................26

Listening 1: Relax and Enjoy! ......................................................................................27
Listening 2: Mixed-Up Lyrics........................................................................................27
Listening 3: Mixed-Up Pictures ....................................................................................28
Listening 4: Dictation ...................................................................................................29
Listening 5: Listening for Rhyming Words ...................................................................30
Listening 6: Listening Gap-Fill .....................................................................................31
Listening 7: Musical Words..........................................................................................32
Listening 8: Song Bingo...............................................................................................33
Listening 9: Find the Mistakes .....................................................................................34
Listening 10: Did You Hear What I Heard?....................................................................34

Section 3: Singing / Music Activities ....................................................................................37

Singing 1: Sing Along With Me .....................................................................................38
Singing 2: Disappearing Song ......................................................................................38
Singing 3: Old Song, New Song ...................................................................................39
Singing 4: One Theme – Many Songs..........................................................................40
Singing 5: Show Me the Word ......................................................................................41
Singing 6: Your Moves..................................................................................................42
Singing 7: Drum and Instrument Circles .......................................................................43
Instrument 1: Can and Bottle Shaker......................................................................44
Instrument 2: Rattle Stick........................................................................................44
Instrument 3: Rain Stick..........................................................................................45
Instrument 4: Bottle Xylophone...............................................................................45
Singing 8: Crazy Lyrics .................................................................................................46
Singing 9: The Halls Are Alive With the Sound of Singing............................................47

ii  
 
  

Section 4: Post-listening Activities ............................................................................... 50

Section 4.A: Post-listening – Speaking Activities ................................................................50
Post-listening – Speaking 1: What Do YOU Think?......................................................50
Post-listening – Speaking 2: Act the Part .....................................................................52
Post-listening – Speaking 3: Small Group Discussion and Summary ..........................53
Post-listening – Speaking 4: Silly Story ........................................................................54
Post-listening – Speaking 5: I’d Like to Ask You About… ............................................55

Section 4.B: Post-listening – Reading Activities ..................................................................58

Post-listening – Reading 1: A Range of Questions.......................................................58
Post-listening – Reading 2: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details ...................................59
Post-listening – Reading 3: Jigsaw Reading ................................................................60
Post-listening – Reading 4: Our Land, Your Land ........................................................62
Post-listening – Reading 5: Reading Groups................................................................64

Section 4.C: Post-listening – Writing ...................................................................................67

Post-listening – Writing 1: Songwriter Histories............................................................67
Post-listening – Writing 2: I Think This Song Rocks! ....................................................68
Post-listening – Writing 3: Paragraph Posters ..............................................................69
Post-listening – Writing 4: Story Extensions ................................................................70
Post-listening – Writing 5: Guest Musicians / Speakers ...............................................71

Section 5: Extended Classroom Approaches ......................................................................78

Extended Classroom Approaches 1: Using a Skit as a Hook.......................................78
Extended Classroom Approaches 2: Song Groups ......................................................80
Extended Classroom Approaches 3: American Pop Star .............................................81

PART II: MATERIALS FOR SING OUT LOUD: TRADITIONAL SONGS…online/in print
*The  Traditional  Songs  units  are  available  online  and  in  the  print  publication.  
Song 1: I’ve Been Working on the Railroad .................................................. online/in print
Song 2: She’ll Be Coming ‘Round the Mountain ........................................... online/in print
Song 3: Michael, Row the Boat Ashore ....................................................... online/in print
Song 4: On Top of Old Smokey .................................................................. online/in print
Song 5: Home on the Range ...................................................................... online/in print
Song 6: Yankee Doodle ............................................................................. online/in print
Song 7: Red River Valley ........................................................................... online/in print
Song 8: Swing Low, Sweet Chariot ............................................................. online/in print
Song 9: Clementine ................................................................................... online/in print
Song 10: Billy Boy ....................................................................................... online/in print
Song 11: Oh! Susanna ................................................................................. online/in print
Song 12: Down in the Valley......................................................................... online/in print
Song 13: He’s Got the Whole World in His Hands .......................................... online/in print

iii  
 
  

PART III: MATERIALS FOR SING OUT LOUD: AMERICAN RHYTHMS............. 82

Song 1: Lessons in Life (Bridgette Bryant) ............................................................ 83
Song 2: Champion (David Kawika Kahiapo)................................................................96
Song 3: Stronger and Stronger (Daniel Ho).................................................................107
Song 4: You Made Me Laugh (Omar Kent Dykes) ......................................................120
Song 5: A Lot of Days Are Gone (Hacienda Brothers) ................................................139
Song 6: Good Morning New Orleans (Kermit Ruffins).................................................152
Song 7: Simple Down (Lael Neale)..............................................................................169
Song 8: El Paso (Danielle Ate the Sandwich)..............................................................187
Song 9: Not Afraid (Turning Pointe).............................................................................201
Song 10: Can’t Stop (Ozomatli) ....................................................................................212
Song 11: Into the Garden (Zach Ladin) ........................................................................226
Song 12: Hey, Little Minivan (Austin Lounge Lizards) ..................................................254
Song 13: Further Down (Kris Gruen) ............................................................................278
Song 14: Just Like Everyday People (Kelli Heath) .......................................................291
Song 15: The Time Is Now (Travis Haddix)..................................................................303
Song 16: Peace (Chen Lo) ...........................................................................................314
Song 17: Supertalents (Mista Cookie Jar & the Chocolate Chips) ...............................328
 
American Rhythms Songs Available Online at americanenglish.state.gov
Song 18: Count Your Sheep (Daniel Ho & Bridgitte Bryant).........................................online
Song 19: America (Victoria Vox)...................................................................................online
Song 20: Localvore (Zach Ladin)..................................................................................online
Song 21: We Dig Worms (Zach Ladin) .........................................................................online
Song 22: Breakfast Lunch and Dinner (Kermit Ruffins)...............................................online

iv  
 
  

USING SONGS IN CLASS: THE SING OUT LOUD SERIES

Songs and music in the classroom are fun, and they are also powerful educational tools that
teachers can use to help students learn English. This book accompanies two CDs of songs
that illustrate American history and culture: Sing Out Loud: Traditional Songs and Sing Out
Loud: American Rhythms.1 The songs in Traditional Songs are famous American folk songs
that students around the country learn while growing up in the U.S. They are often connected
to cultural characteristics and historical events in the U.S. The selections in American Rhythms
represent present-day genres of American music, including folk music, rap and hip hop, jazz
and blues, pop rock, indie, and acoustic music.

There are many pedagogically sound reasons for using songs in the language classroom:
• to provide authentic listening comprehension practice
• to cultivate interest in listening activities
• to create intrinsic motivation for listening
• to introduce different intonation and stress patterns
• to develop sound and word discrimination skills
• to present opportunities to develop listening comprehension skills, including listening for
specific details
• to increase active participation in listening activities

Using songs in class can help students:

• learn and practice good prediction strategies
• encounter vocabulary and language forms in an authentic context
• practice speaking, reading and writing skills in integrated ways
• enrich cultural understanding

How This Book Is Organized

This teacher’s book is divided into three parts: Part I: General Song Activities, Part II: Song
Menus and Materials: Traditional Songs, and Part III: Song Menus and Materials: American
Rhythms.

Part I of the book presents 50 activities, each of which includes a basic activity description
followed by possible modifications to vary the activities and materials to fit different proficiency
levels and classroom contexts. These activities can be used with the songs on the Sing Out
Loud: Traditional Songs and the Sing Out Loud: American Rhythms CDs as well as any other
song you wish to use in your class. The activities in Part I are divided into five main sections:

Organization of Part I. Five Types of General Activities

1. Pre-listening activities The 13 pre-listening activities are intended to activate
background knowledge and generate interest in the song
and the themes represented by it. They introduce
vocabulary and/or language structures that students will
encounter in the song. Many incorporate pictures to
increase interest and comprehension.

                                                                                                           
1
 An additional CD especially engages young learners with beginning language skills in English. The Sing Out Loud: Children’s
Songs CD includes 13 songs typically sung to (and by) young children in the U.S. and has an accompanying activity book.

1  
 
  

2. Listening activities The ten listening activities provide students with tasks to
complete while listening to the song. These activities help
students focus their attention on aspects of the song,
including explicit attention to the vocabulary and language
forms and comprehension of the lyrics.

3. Singing / Music activities The nine singing activities provide different levels of
involvement in learning to sing and perform the songs. The
purpose of these activities is generally to give students
practice producing spoken English in an enjoyable group
environment. The rhythm and melody of songs lets
students practice pronunciation, intonation, and rhythm.
This section also includes instructions for constructing four
homemade instruments.

4. Post-listening activities, The post-listening section includes 15 song activities,

including evenly divided among three language skills: speaking,
a. Speaking reading, and writing. These post-listening activities
b. Reading generally reinforce and/or extend students’ learning of the
c. Writing language forms and themes used in the songs, while at
the same time giving additional practice in developing
these three skills.

5. Extended classroom Three activities make up the final section of Part 1. They
approaches involve the students extensively in the teaching and
practicing of songs in an English language classroom, and
may require more time in and out of the classroom. These
activities may work best after your students have used the
songs in the classroom several times.

Each activity description in Part 1 contains information about

• the educational purpose of the activity
• the proficiency level(s) for which each activity is intended
• the amount of time needed to complete the activity during class
• a description of materials that should be prepared before class
• step-by-step instructions for carrying out the activity
• possible modifications that can be used to adjust the activity for different songs,
proficiency levels, and classroom contexts
• an index of song units that model the activity

The proficiency levels indicated at the beginning of each activity are general guidelines that
refer to the language proficiency needed to complete the activity successfully. However, each
activity can be modified to match the needs of different ages, proficiency levels, and classroom
contexts. In the activity descriptions, many modifications are provided, which are discussed in
more detail below. First, however, let’s consider the proficiency levels and what they mean in
the context of this book.

The proficiency levels used in this book have been adapted from the PreK-12 English Language
Proficiency Standards Framework of Teachers of English to Speakers of Other Languages, Inc.

2  
 
  

(TESOL). (Used with permission; full standards are available at: http://www.tesol.org). In
general, most of the activities in Sing Out Loud: Traditional Songs and Sing Out Loud: American
Rhythms target learners at Levels 2 and 3 (or above). (Sing Out Loud: Children’s Songs is
aimed at beginning learners at Levels 1 and 2.)

TESOL Proficiency Description (http://www.tesol.org)

Level

Level 1 – Starting Students initially have limited or no understanding of English. They

rarely use English for communication. They respond nonverbally to
simple commands, statements, and questions. As their oral
comprehension increases, they begin to imitate the verbalizations of
others by using single words or simple phrases, and they begin to use
English spontaneously.
At the earliest stage, these learners construct meaning from text
primarily through illustrations, graphs, maps, and tables.

Level 2 – Emerging Students can understand phrases and short sentences. They can
communicate limited information in simple everyday and routine
situations by using memorized phrases, groups of words, and
formulae. They can use selected simple structures correctly but still
systematically produce basic errors. Students begin to use general
academic vocabulary and familiar everyday expressions. Errors in
writing are present that often hinder communication.

Level 3 – Developing Students understand more complex speech but still may require some
repetition. They use English spontaneously but may have difficulty
expressing all their thoughts due to a restricted vocabulary and limited
command of language structure. Students at this level speak in simple
sentences, which are comprehensible and appropriate, but which are
frequently marked by grammatical errors. Proficiency in reading varies
considerably. Students are most successful constructing meaning from
texts for which they have background knowledge upon which to build.

Level 4 – Expanding Students’ language skills are adequate for most day-to-day
communication needs. They communicate in English in new or
unfamiliar settings but have occasional difficulty with complex
structures and abstract academic concepts.
Students at this level may read with considerable fluency and are
able to locate and identify the specific facts within the text. However,
they may not understand texts in which the concepts are presented in
a decontextualized manner, the sentence structure is complex, or the
vocabulary is abstract or has multiple meanings. They can read
independently but may have occasional comprehension problems,
especially when processing grade-level information.

3  
 
  

 
Level 5 - Bridging Students can express themselves fluently and spontaneously on a
wide range of personal, general, academic or social topics in a variety
of contexts. They are poised to function in an environment with
native-speaking peers with minimal language support or guidance.
Students have a good command of technical and academic
vocabulary as well of idiomatic expressions and colloquialisms. They
can produce clear, smoothly flowing, well-structured texts of differing
lengths and degrees of linguistic complexity. Errors are minimal,
difficult to spot, and generally corrected when they occur.

The songs and activities included for Sing Out Loud: Traditional Songs are designed with
students ages 10-14 years in mind. Most of these activities target students at approximately
Levels 2, 3 and 4, although many can be fairly easily modified for students with truly beginning
(Level 1) language skills. Younger students may also find these songs engaging.

The songs and activities included for Sing Out Loud: American Rhythms are designed with
students ages 14-18 years in mind. Most of these activities target students at approximately
Level 3 and above, but again can be fairly easily modified for students with lower proficiency
levels.

As mentioned above, the general activities described in Part I of this book have been presented
along with possible modifications in order to
• offer a greater variety of activities
• make activities more and less challenging
• adjust the activities for different classroom contexts (large classes, classrooms with little
space to move around in, or classes with limited access to additional resources, etc..)

Each modification is marked with a descriptive label to indicate how it differs from the basic
activity. For example:
• an activity for Level 2 students with a modification labeled – difficulty means it is
appropriate for Level 1 students
• an activity with a modification labeled – materials will require less teacher preparation,
such as photocopying or preparing handouts

To help you determine whether a particular activity modification is appropriate for your needs,
the table below lists the modification labels along with a brief explanation of what they mean.

Modifications. Labels used in the Part I general activities

Proficiency level
modification to adjust the expected proficiency level of the students

+ / - difficulty increased difficulty (+), decreased difficulty (-)

+ scaffolding activity includes additional instructional support to help students
complete the task

4  
 
  

Materials
modification to adjust the number or type of materials needed to complete the activity

+ / - materials additional (+) or fewer/no (-) materials are needed

+ / - pictures pictures are used (+) or not used (-)
+ dictionary students will need dictionaries
Purposes, Language Skills, and Content
modification to adjust the purpose of the activity, or the type of language or content focus
+ (language feature) a specific feature of language is the focus of the activity
verb forms, past tense,
future, active/passive
voice, phrases, word
forms, synonyms,
rhyming, definitions,
conditionals, questions,
sound discrimination

+ (language skill) a specific language skill is the focus of the activity

speaking, writing,
spelling, charts/graphs

+ (cognitive skill) a specific cognitive skill is used in the activity

prediction, memory,
creativity, summary,
research, main ideas,
decision-making

+ (other) other possible modifications to vary the focus of the activity

art, music, mime, role-
play, history, humor,
fun, songwriting

Classroom context
modification to adjust for the size, design, and resources of a particular classroom

+ extension extended to include additional steps and/or content; these

activities generally take more classroom time
+ competition activity becomes a contest or competition between students or
groups
+ / - groups students complete the activity in small groups (+); students
complete the activity individually or as a class rather than in
small groups (-)
+ large classes modification works well for large classes
+ / - space the amount of physical space needed in the classroom

5  
 
  

Classroom Context (continued)

+ / - movement whether students are required to move around the classroom
+ equal participation activity structured to ensure all group members participate
equally
+ / - time more (+) or less (-) time is required than indicated in the basic
activity

Part II (Traditional Songs) and Part III (American Rhythms) of the book provide a feast of class
materials to be used with the songs on the Sing Out Loud CDs, collected into a song unit for
each of the selections on the CD. Each song unit includes the following items:

1. an activity menu that lists 12 activities suggested for the song

2. the lyrics of the song
3. activity descriptions and instructions for the suggested activities, including three pre-
listening, three listening, three singing, and three post-listening activities (one speaking,
one reading, one writing), along with any accompanying materials (such as discussion
questions, handouts, and pictures) needed to use the activity
4. a simple reading text to help you and your students understand the history, themes,
and/or style of the song
5. answer keys to the activities suggested in the unit

Choose activities from each menu that are suitable and will appeal to your students, just as you
would select food items from a restaurant menu. You may decide to do one, two or three
activities from each menu section. Try at least one pre-listening, one listening, one singing, and
one post-listening activity for each song. And spice things up by adding your own ideas and
activities.

While the song units for Part III (American Rhythms) have been included on this disc, the song
units for Part II (Traditional Songs) are available online and in the print publication.

6  
 
 PART I: GENERAL SONG ACTIVITIES
The instructions for the various activities used in the book are described below. Parts II and III suggest
these activities for particular songs and provide accompanying materials. For your reference, an index of
song units that model each activity is provided at the end of each activity section. The index includes
references to additional songs and song units, which are available online at americanenglish.state.gov.
You can use this index to locate examples of the materials that are described in Part I. However, most of
the following activities can be used with any song that you wish to teach.

Section 1: Pre-listening Activities

Listening to new songs presents unique challenges. Before listening to a song, teachers should prepare
student. Pre-listening activities can
• introduce new words or phrases that students will hear in the song
• activate students’ background knowledge about a particular topic so they can better predict what
they will hear
• introduce cultural references to help students understand the song
• motivate students and spark interest in the song

Pre-listening activities can be done in a variety of ways:

• class games or discussions based on particular topics
• the presentation of new vocabulary, phrases, or grammar structures
• the practice of prediction strategies based on key ideas
• the use of pictures to increase interest in the song and offer visual clues to help students
understand vocabulary and themes

Included below are 13 pre-listening general activities that you can adapt to almost any song.

Pre-listening 1: Four Corners ................................................................................................... 9

Pre-listening 2: One Title, Several Words – Many Possibilities ............................................... 10
Pre-listening 3: Swat ................................................................................................................ 11
Pre-listening 4: Stanza Creation .............................................................................................. 12
Pre-listening 5: Unscramble the Sentences ............................................................................. 13
Pre-listening 6: Find Someone Who…..................................................................................... 14
Pre-listening 7: What Do You Know About…?......................................................................... 16
Pre-listening 8: Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary ................................................ 17
Pre-listening 9: Picture Predictions .......................................................................................... 18
Pre-listening 10: Can You See What I See? .............................................................................. 19
Pre-listening 11: It Could Be / There Might Be........................................................................... 20
Pre-listening 12: Picture Dictation .............................................................................................. 22
Pre-listening 13: How Many Questions in a Minute? ................................................................. 23

The last five activities are specifically designed to use pictures (although many other activities include
modifications to incorporate pictures). Many pictures are provided in Parts II and III. You can also find
suitable pictures on the Internet and in magazines and newspapers for these and other songs. Most
activities require very few or no materials at all. For activities that do require specific materials, you can
find examples in Parts II and III when these activities are applied to teaching specific songs. An index of
song units that model these activities is provided at the end of this pre-listening activity section (including
references to additional songs and song units that are available online.)

.............................................................................................................................................

8  
 
Pre-listening 1: Four Corners

Purpose: To generate interest in the song, express opinions, and make choices about controversial
ideas/statements

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Note to the teacher: This activity requires enough space for students to move around easily.

Preparation and Materials: Prepare three to five controversial statements related to the theme of the
song with which students can agree or disagree. Label four corners or areas of the classroom with
posters or signs that say
Strongly Agree Agree Disagree Strongly Disagree

Instructions:
1. Write one of the controversial statements on the board. Example:
Women can do physical work just as well as men.
2. Ask all the students to walk to and stand in the corner that matches how they feel about that
statement.
3. Once everyone is in a corner, ask students to share with the others in the same corner why they
feel that way about the statement. After small group discussions, each corner can then explain to
the rest of the class the various reasons why their group feels this way.
4. Repeat the procedure for each of the prepared controversial statements.

Modifications:
A. + time Choose several lines from the song and write controversial statements
that correspond to those lines. Write the controversial statements on
the board and follow Steps 1 – 4 above. After listening to the song,
write the corresponding line from the song next to each controversial
statement. Follow up with a discussion.

B. - difficulty Instead of controversial statements, use topics, activities, or objects

that students may like or dislike. Topics can relate to music in general
or to specific themes in the song. Use emotive words to label the
corners of the room. Examples:
Really Like! Like Don’t Like Yuck!

C. + difficulty Use multiple-choice questions that have four answers and label the
corners of the room A, B, C, and D. Ask students to stand in the corner
that matches their preferred response. The topics of the questions can
relate to music in general or to specific themes in the song. Example:
Which type of music is the best?
A. Classical B. Rap C. Pop D. Rock

D. + large classes Ask students to respond by raising their hands or holding up cards with
- space their choices. Then select a few students to explain their answers.
- movement
- time

E. - difficulty Instead of controversial statements, write the title of the song on the
+ materials board. Find four large pictures that relate in some way to the title or
+ pictures theme of the song, and hang them in four places in the room. Have
students read the song title and choose which picture represents the
title or possible themes in the song. Ask them to explain their choice.
After they listen to the song, allow them to change their opinion.

9  
 
 Modifications (continued)

F. + extension Instead of controversial statements, write the title of the song on the
+ groups board. Divide the class into four groups and ask each group to write on
+ difficulty large posters or sheets of paper one or two sentences predicting what
+ writing the song will be about. Hang the four predictions in the corners of the
+ time classroom. Tell students to go to the corner with the prediction that they
think is most accurate. After listening to the song, hold a class
discussion to discuss which prediction was most accurate.

Pre-listening 2: One Title, Several Words — Many Possibilities

Purpose: To predict the content, generate interest, and introduce vocabulary for the song

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes, plus the length of the song

Note to the Teacher: If students make predictions in their first language because they do not have the
vocabulary to express themselves, you may wish to teach them some keywords. However, limit the
number of new words to approximately five to eight. (+ time)

Preparation and Materials: Write the title of the song on the board. Select five key content words from
the song. Students will use these words to generate predictions about the song.

Instructions:
1. Tell students that the line on the board is the title of a song that they are going to listen to. Explain
any of the words in the title that students may not know.
2. Ask students to guess what the song is about. Appoint individual students or invite all students to
call out ideas. Write their ideas on the board.
3. Write on the board the five key content words that you pre-selected from the song. Ask students if
they want to change their predictions. Write any new ideas on the board.
4. After listening to the song, ask students to check whether their predictions were correct.

Modifications:
A. + groups Divide students into groups of four or five. Ask them to discuss and
+ writing write down their predictions. Then ask each group to share their ideas
+ time with the whole class.

B. - difficulty Write the song title on the board along with question words relevant to
+ scaffolding the song. Provide simple, short answers to these questions, and get
students to suggest the plot or theme of the song. Example (for On Top
of Old Smokey):
Who? Someone in love
Where? On top of a mountain
What? She lost her true lover

C. - difficulty Write the song title on the board along with question words that are
+ scaffolding relevant to the song (not all words will be relevant for every song):
Who? Where? What? Why? When?
(optional) Ask students to think of a brief response (as in Modification B) that
+ groups predicts what will happen in the song.

10  
 
 Modifications (cont.)

D. + difficulty Repeat the process in Modification C above, but this time ask students
+ questions to think of a Wh-question and then predict the answer to the question.
+ time Example: Students might have these questions:
Who will be the main character in the song?
Where will the song take place?
What will happen in the song?
Why will this happen?
When will the action take place?

E. + groups Ask students to draw a picture of what the song might be about. Divide
+ time the students into groups of four or five so they can share their pictures
+ art and predictions with their group.

F. - difficulty Prepare large pictures that represent the keywords to help students
+ materials learn the words. Follow Steps 1 through 4 above.
+ pictures

Pre-listening 3: Swat

Purpose: To introduce vocabulary from the song, and make print and sound connections

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Note to the Teacher: This activity involves swatting or slapping words or pictures, and requires enough
space in the classroom for students to move around. However, the activity can also be done by pointing
to or circling the target item.

Preparation and Materials: Choose eight to ten key vocabulary words (or phrases) from the song. Add
additional words that sound similar, look similar, or are related to the keywords so that you have a set of
15 – 20 words. Write all of the words on the board in random order. Provide a flyswatter or rolled-up
newspaper for each team.

Instructions:
1. Point to each word, say the word, and have the students repeat the word after you. Explain the
meaning of the words, if needed.
2. Divide the class into two, three, or four teams. Give each team a flyswatter or a rolled-up
newspaper. Tell the teams to stand in lines at an equal distance away from the board.
3. Explain that you will call out a word. The first person from each team must race to the board and
hit the word with the flyswatter or newspaper. The team that hits the correct word first gets a
point.
4. Tell the first person to give the flyswatter or newspaper to the next person on the team and to
proceed to the back of the line.
5. Call out words in random order. You can use words more than once. As the game continues,
each person on the team should have a chance to swat the words. At the end of the game, the
team with the most points wins.

Modifications:
A. + difficulty Select all of the rhyming words from the song, and choose additional
+ sound words that rhyme with those words or that look similar (such as who
discrimination and how). Then follow Steps 1 through 4 above.

11  
 
 Modifications (cont.)

B. - difficulty Hang up large pictures that represent the key vocabulary words with
+ materials the word written underneath. Tell students to race up to swat the picture
+ pictures as you call out the vocabulary words.

C. +extension Once students have learned the words, let students take turns calling
+time out the words to swat.

D. + difficulty Give each group a poster or large piece of paper to write on, and tell
- movement them to write on their poster the word that you call out. The first group
+ spelling to write the word with the correct spelling gets one point.

E. + difficulty Write on the board phrases or lines from the song instead of single
+ phrases words. This works well for songs with idioms or common phrases.

F. + extension Create two sets of words. Set 1 has eight to ten words from the song.
+ difficulty Set 2 has eight to ten synonyms of the words from the song. Write Set
+ synonyms 2 (the synonyms) on the board in random order. Call out the words from
the song (Set 1) and have students swat the correct synonym (Set 2).

G. + difficulty Choose five to eight words from the song, some that have regular forms
+ word forms and others that have irregular forms. On the board, write many different
forms of each word in random order. Include incorrect items so that
students must choose between correct and incorrect forms. Example:
For child, you could write
childrens children childs
Have students race to swat the correct word based on clues:
Swat the plural form of the noun ‘child.’

Possible features to include: plural/singular nouns, verb forms (past

tense of eat – ate vs. eated), comparative/superlative adjectives
(shorter vs. more short).

Pre-listening 4: Stanza Creation

Purpose: To predict the content, generate interest, and introduce vocabulary for the song, and write
phrases and sentences

Level: 3 and above Time: 30 – 40 minutes, plus the length of the song

Note to the Teacher: This activity may be extended over several class sessions. Session 1 (Steps 1 –
4): 20 – 25 minutes; Session 2 (Steps 5 – 6): 10 – 15 minutes.

Preparation and Materials: Choose a stanza from the song. Select eight to ten keywords for the stanza
and write them on the board in random order.

Instructions:
1. Divide the students into groups of three or four.
2. Elicit or teach the features of song stanzas: they are similar to poems; they tend to have four
lines; and they use rhythm, repetition, and rhyme for coherence.

12  
 
 3. Explain that each group should write a stanza using all of the words or phrases on the board.
Explain that they may add as many words as they like, but they must use all of the keywords on
the board.
4. Give the groups 10 – 15 minutes to write their stanzas, helping them when requested.
5. When the time is up, ask groups to share what they wrote.
6. During the first listening of the song, ask students to compare their stanzas to the actual song.
Discuss or comment on how similar the student’s stanzas were to the original song.

Modifications:
A. + groups To use more than one stanza from the song, write different word sets
+ time from multiple stanzas on separate sections of the board. Assign a
different set to each group. You may have several groups working on
each stanza. Follow Steps 1 – 6 above.

B. + groups Have groups use the whole song and create more than one stanza.
+ difficulty
+ time

C. - difficulty Use complete phrases or sentences instead of individual words. Have

+ scaffolding students combine the phrases or sentences to create the stanza.

D. - difficulty Create a worksheet of lyrics for the stanza with gaps for eight to ten
+ scaffolding words. Tell students to create versions of the stanza by choosing words
+ materials to fill each gap. Give one point for each word that is used in the original
+ competition gap in the stanza. (Note: this activity is similar to a gap-fill activity, but
allows students to fill in the stanzas creatively rather than listening to
the stanza first.)

E. - difficulty Ask students to generate ideas for the theme of the stanza based on
+ art the words on the board. You can provide all of the words for the stanza
- writing in one grouping,
- or create groups of words that correspond to each line
in the stanza. Have students draw a comic strip to illustrate their
predictions for the content of the stanza.

Pre-listening 5: Unscramble the Sentences

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary and grammar from the song, and write phrases
and sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes, plus the length of the song

Preparation and Materials: Select five to eight of sentences from the song. You may choose all of the
sentences from the same stanza or a set of sentences from the entire song at an appropriate level for
your students. For each sentence, write the words in random order on a slip of paper. You will need at
least one slip for each group of students.

Instructions:
1. Divide the students into small groups of three or four.
2. Pre-teach any new words from the selected sentences.
3. Explain to students that they will have to recreate a sentence from words you will give them.

13  
 
 4. Give each group the words from one mixed-up (scrambled) sentence. Ask each group to create
one sentence using their knowledge of sentence structure and vocabulary. Students can cut apart
the words and re-arrange them on their desks, or you can provide space for students to rewrite
the sentences below the scrambled words.
5. When they have created a sentence with their words, ask them to write it on the board.
6. Ask the class to look at each sentence written on the board to determine if it is correct. If not, ask
the class how to correct it.
7. If you are using all sentences from a stanza, ask students to recreate a complete
verse of the song by unscrambling the sentences and putting the lines on the board
in the right order.
8. Play the song for students to check their answers.

Modifications:
A. + difficulty Create a handout with multiple scrambled sentences, and have each
+ time group unscramble all of the sentences. First, groups can compare their
version with the other groups’ versions and then compare their version
with the lyrics of the song.

B. - difficulty Give students clues about the word order and then get them to recreate
+ scaffolding the rest of the sentence. Two possible clues:
Indicate the first and last word
Group words into phrases

C. - groups Write the words or phrases in large letters on separate pieces of paper.
Hang the words/phrases on the board in random order. Ask individual
students to come to the board and reposition one of the words/phrases
based on suggestions from the class. Continue to invite students up
until the sentence is unscrambled correctly.

D. + difficulty Mix written words together with pictures. Find small pictures to
+ materials represent three to five words in the sentence. Include the remaining
+ pictures words in written form. Ask students to determine the correct word and
+ writing write it underneath the picture. Then get students to recreate the
sentences. Example:

with on from I oh come my my

Pre-listening 6: Find Someone Who…

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, activate background knowledge
about the topic, and ask and answer questions

Level: 2 and above Time: 30 minutes, plus the length of the song

Preparation and Materials: Prepare eight to ten yes/no questions. The list of questions should: 1) be
about students’ qualities, abilities, and experiences; 2) be related to the theme of the song; and 3)
practice some of the vocabulary in the song. Write the list of questions on the board or create a handout
containing the questions.

14  
 
Instructions:
1. Introduce the activity by speaking about your own past experience(s) that relate to the theme of
the song.
2. Ask students to look at the list of questions on the board or handout. Explain any new vocabulary.
3. Explain that the students will need to ask each other these questions. For each question, they
must find one person who can answer yes to that question. Instruct the students to write the
name of the person next to the question. They may not use the same person for more than one
question. The first person to complete the task wins.
4. Tell the students to stand up and walk around while completing this task. Circulate among them
and make sure they are asking and answering questions.
5. Announce the winner when the first student has completed the task.
6. After the game is finished, review the list of questions, asking students to speak about the
classmates who answered ‘yes’ to certain questions.
7. Tell them to listen to the song and to circle all of the words in the questions that are also in the
song.

Modifications:
A. + large classes Only prepare four to six questions. Divide students into groups of eight
+ groups to ten, and carry out the activity as described above.

B. + groups Divide students into smaller groups of four to six. Instead of writing the
- difficulty questions on the board, create small cards with one question on each
+ materials card. Each group should have one card per group member, and each
group member should have a different question

The group sits in a circle with the cards in the center. One at a time,
each group member takes a card, reads the question, and passes it to
the person sitting to the right. Each student then writes an answer (yes
or no) on the card before passing it to the right again. Repeat this
process until the card gets back to the student who picked it from the
center. That student reads the card and then summarizes the most
common response to the question for the rest of the group.

C. + difficulty Create one set of questions using the present perfect. Example:
+ speaking Have you ever ridden on the railroad?
+ verb forms Then create follow-up questions in the past tense:
+ questions When did you ride on the railroad?
Get students to practice answering the questions using the verb tense /
aspect modeled in the question.

D. + difficulty Provide keywords from the song, and have students form questions as
+ writing they complete Steps 3 – 7 above. This activity can be extended into a
+ time second class session. Session 1 (writing questions): 15 – 20 minutes;
Session 2 (Steps 3 – 7 above): 15 – 20 minutes.
(optional)
+ groups

E. - difficulty Provide pictures that represent the key vocabulary items (objects or
+ pictures action verbs) from the song. Teach students two question forms. For
example, if you use verbs from the song, you might teach questions in
the following forms:
Have you ever ________?
Do you like __________?

15  
 
Pre-listening 7: What Do You Know About…?

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes, plus the length of the song

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a short, fun quiz on the same topic as the song. The quiz should
contain general information questions to activate students’ background knowledge. The quiz could
contain true/false, multiple choice, or short-answer questions. It can be read aloud or you can create a
handout.

Instructions:
1. Organize students into small groups of three or four.
2. Write the topic of the song on the board. Tell students that you are going to give them a quiz on
this topic. The team that answers the most questions correctly is the winner.
3. Distribute the quiz handout or read the first question aloud to the students. Allow them time to
discuss the question in their groups and decide on the first answer. Students should record their
group’s answer on a piece of paper. Go on to the next question.
4. At the end of the quiz, go through the questions again and tell the students the correct answers.
Reward the group with the most correct answers with a prize or applause.
5. Discuss which words from the quiz might be in the song. Listen to the song to check students’
predictions.

Modifications:
A. + extension Tell students the title of the song. Ask groups to prepare a quiz
+ writing containing three to five questions about the topic. Then groups will
+ time exchange questions with other groups and take the quiz.

B. + difficulty Create open-ended questions that require students to respond by

+ writing writing one or two sentences.
+ time

C. - groups Create a quiz with multiple-choice answers. Read the questions aloud
- time and have students raise their hands to vote for the correct answer.
Record the number of votes for each possible response.

D. + difficulty Create difficult questions that require students to work together to

answer them. The first group to answer a question correctly gets a
point.

16  
 
Pre-listening 8: Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary

Purpose: To generate interest, activate background knowledge about the topic, and introduce
vocabulary related to the song

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Choose a word, phrase, or sentence that relates to an important topic or
theme from the song as the starting point for brainstorming. You can use a phrase or a line from the song,
or a popular expression.

Instructions:
1. Write the chosen word, phrase, or sentence in the middle of the board and circle it.
2. Encourage students to call out any thoughts that come to mind when they see the word, phrase,
or sentence. Write the students’ ideas on the board, or have students come to the board and
write down their own thoughts.
3. Ask the students to look at these ideas to see if they can be grouped into subtopics. Write the
suggested subtopics in smaller circles around the main idea and connect them with lines to the
main circle to create a “mind map.”

4. Ask the students to contribute new ideas based on these subtopics.

5. Try to extend these ideas whenever possible to include content/vocabulary connected to the
song.
6. Play the song. Ask students to mark which of their ideas/words are actually in the song.

Modifications:
A. + groups Choose several words, phrases, or sentences that relate to the song.
+ time Divide students into small groups. Circulate several pieces of paper,
each with different words/phrases/sentences as the starting points for
brainstorming. Ask each group to write down their ideas on one paper,
pass it to another group, and generate ideas for a new mind map.
Continue this activity until everyone has shared ideas, and then ask
each group to report on the paper that they have in front of them.

B. + difficulty Repeat the same instructions (Steps 1 – 6 above), but let the students
+ time create their own mind maps at their desks. Then post these mind maps
on different sections of the board and compare them, noting any
similarities or differences.

C. + materials Use a picture as the starting point for brainstorming.

+ pictures

17  
 
 Modifications (cont.)

D. + groups Divide students into small groups, and give each group the same
+ competition starting point. Ask students to brainstorm in their groups for five or ten
+ time minutes. The group with the most detailed mind map is the winner.

E. + extension After generating the mind maps, according to the activity in Modification
+ competition E, play the song and ask students to identify any ideas that they wrote
+ time down and that appear in the song. The team wins who came up with
the most ideas also in the song.

Pre-listening 9: Picture Predictions

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary related to the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a large picture or a photograph related to the theme of the song
and hang it on the board. Optional: you may write the title of the song underneath the picture to help
students make their predictions.

Instructions:
1. Show the picture to the students and explain that it represents a story.
2. Tell the students that together they are going to create the story.
3. Prompt the students to help them create the story. You can begin by asking them who the
characters are, where they live, when the story took place, what happened first, etc.
4. Invite students to construct the story orally as a whole class, prompting them when necessary
and teaching them vocabulary when needed. Alternatively, you can divide the class into small
groups to write the story.
5. Tell students they are going to listen to a song about the same picture, and they should compare
their story to the one they hear in the song.

Modifications:
A. + groups Divide the students into small groups of three or four. Show them the
- difficulty picture, and ask each group to create a title for the song (instead of a
story) based on the picture. Ask each group to read their title aloud.
The class can vote on the funniest or most creative title. Tell them the
real title and see which prediction was the closest. Move on to
predicting what the song is about.

B. + groups Divide the students into small groups and tell them the title of the song.
Ask the students to predict what will probably be in the picture.

C. - difficulty Give the students the title of the song, and teach them any new
+ art vocabulary words. Ask them to draw a picture to go with the song.
When they finish, they can compare their pictures with the one you
have.

D. + difficulty Use questions to prompt the students to re-tell the story using the past
+ past tense tense. Example questions:
18  
 
 Modifications (cont.)

When did the story take place?

What happened first?
What happened second?

E. - difficulty Use several pictures to help students predict the possible content of the
+ scaffolding song, especially for longer songs or for topics that the students may not
+ materials have much background knowledge about.

Pre-listening 10: Can You See What I See?

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary from the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 25 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a large picture or a photograph related to the theme of the song
and hang it on the board. The picture should contain many items or details that students will find in the
picture. Optional: choose a line from the song that corresponds to the picture.

Instructions:
1. Divide students into small groups of three or four. Tell them that in each group there should be
one recorder who writes down what the other students say. Ask the recorder to write the letters of
the alphabet down the left side of a piece of paper.
2. Tell students that they have ten minutes to complete the alphabet list. They need one word
beginning with A, one word beginning with B, one with C, and so on; however, all of the words
must be in the picture you are going to show them. Any word that appears in the picture and is
listed next to the correct letter will be counted as correct. They will get one point for each correct
word on their list.
3. Show the groups the picture. If groups at the back of the class are having trouble seeing it, you
can allow them to move back and forth between the picture and their group recorder. You can
help students if they are having difficulty. (For example, students will often write ‘girl’ for G and or
‘boy’ for B, but they forget things like ‘arm’ for A.)
4. When time is up, tell the recorders to stop writing. Ask each group to exchange lists with another
group, and ask the new group to count the number of correct words. Reward the winning group
with a prize or applause.
5. Tell students that the picture relates to the song. (Optional: write the corresponding line from the
song next to the picture.) Ask them to predict what the song may be about. Ask them to predict
which of the words on their lists will be in the song.

Modifications:
A. - difficulty Show the students the picture for only 45 seconds. Have all of the
+ memory students in the group look at the picture. As a group, have the students
- time make a list of all the things they remember seeing in the picture
(without listing them alphabetically). You may show the picture to the
students a second time, if desired.

B. + difficulty Show students the picture, and ask them to name as many things in the
+ synonyms picture as possible. Then have students come up with synonyms for
each of the words. The group with the most words wins.

19  
 
 Modifications (cont.)

C. - difficulty Choose eight to twelve items in the picture for students to find. Tell the
- time students the letters that these words start with, and have them find one
word that starts with each of those letters.

D. + difficulty Write on the board the words for eight to ten items that can be seen in
+ word forms the picture in both their singular and plural form. You can provide some
distractors that are incorrect. For example, you might write child,
children and childs on the board. Have students circle the correct form
of the word to match whether that item appears in the picture once or
multiple times.

E. - difficulty Create a worksheet that contains one line for each item that you want
- time students to find. On the line, provide one blank for each letter in the
word, and fill in the first letter. Ask students to find and fill in the rest of
the letters. If needed, you can provide more than one letter in the word.
An example is given below.

m a n__

b ____ ____ ____ ____

n ___ ___ ___ p ___ ___ ___ ___

s h ___ ___ ___

Pre-Listening 11: It Could Be / There Might Be

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary from the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a large picture or photograph related to the theme of the song and
hang it on the board. Cover the picture with about five or six strips of plain paper so that the students
cannot see the picture. Optional: choose one line or phrase from the song that is related to the picture.

Instructions:
1. Divide the students into pairs. You may need to pre-teach language forms necessary for guessing
(It might be…; It could be…; I think it is …; I am sure there is …).
2. Tell students that you will show them only part of the picture, and using the language forms
presented in Step 1, they should try to guess what the picture is about.
3. Remove one strip of paper so that only one part of the picture is revealed.
4. Ask students to describe what they see. Then ask them to guess what else might be in the picture
based on what they can see. They can discuss their guesses in pairs.

20  
 
 5. Then remove another strip of paper revealing more of the picture. Again, in pairs, students can
make predictions. Their predictions will become more definite as the activity continues.
6. When all the slips of paper are removed, you can then ask students to predict, based on the
picture, what the song might be about. Optional: once all the slips of paper have been removed,
write the line or phrase that you selected from the song on the board next to the picture. Using
the picture and the line or phrase ask students to make their predictions.

Modifications:
A. + groups Instead of putting the picture on the board, cut the picture into four to
+ time six pieces. Divide the students into groups (the same number of groups
as you have picture pieces), and give each group one piece. Ask each
group to guess what the picture might be without looking at the picture
pieces held by other groups. Ask each group to share their guesses
with the class. Then the whole class together works to put the picture
back together on the board. Compare the students’ guesses with the
re-assembled picture.

B. - difficulty For pictures that portray a single item or vocabulary word, draw blanks
on the board, one for each letter in the word. As students guess what
the picture is, also ask them to guess the letters in the word. You can
provide some of the letters in the blanks if the students need more
clues. Example:

m i n i v a n .

C. + difficulty Follow the steps for Modification B, but instead of using a vocabulary
word, have students spell out the title of the song. Example:

c o u n t y o u r .

s h e e p .

21  
 
Pre-Listening 12: Picture Dictation

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary from the song, activate background knowledge
about the topic, and learn to recognize prepositions

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare one picture or a photograph related to the theme of the song.
Optional: choose a line from the song that corresponds to the picture.

Instructions:
1. Ask the students to take out a blank piece of paper and a pencil. Tell them this will be a picture
dictation, because they are going to draw instead of write.
2. Slowly start describing the picture. Give the students time to draw as you describe it. Example:
In the bottom, left-hand corner there is a rabbit.
Next to the rabbit is a tree.
There are apples in the tree.
3. When you are finished, students can share what they drew either with the students next to them
or with the whole class.
4. Display the original picture and see which students’ pictures most resemble it.
5. Optional: write the line that you chose from the song on the board next to the picture.
6. Move on to predicting what the song might be about based on this picture (and the line from the
song, if using one).

Modifications:
A. + groups Divide students into pairs or small groups. Ask them to sit so that one
+ difficulty student is facing the board and can see the picture, while the other
+ speaking student is facing away from the board and cannot see the picture. The
+ time student who can see the picture describes it for his or her partner. The
partner listens and draws a picture. Optional: prepare two pictures so
that students can switch roles.

B. + groups Divide students into pairs as in Modification A. Show Student A only

+ difficulty half of the picture with instructions to describe this half to Student B.
+ speaking Then have the students change positions and reveal the other half of
+ time the picture to Student B. In this way both students will have the
opportunity to dictate half of the picture to their partner and to draw half
of it.

C. + groups Make enough copies of the picture for each group to have one, and cut
+ materials out each of the objects in the picture. Divide the students into small
- art groups. Give one set of cut-out objects to each group. Then describe
the locations of each of the objects based on the complete picture.
Have the groups re-create the picture by arranging them on their desks.
When they have finished, let students compare their pictures to the
original.

22  
 
Pre-Listening 13: How Many Questions in a Minute?

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary from the song, activate background knowledge
about the topic, and practice asking and answering questions

Level: 3 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a large picture or a photograph related to the theme of the song
and hang it on the board.

Instructions:
1. Divide the students into small groups of three. Everyone should be able to see the picture.
2. Assign a different role/task to each group member. Suggested the following roles:
The Questioner asks as many questions about the picture as possible in three minutes.
Questions can be about anything in the picture. Examples:
What is the girl doing?
What color is this?
Why do you think the girl is swimming there?
The Answerer answers the questions.
The Counter counts how many questions were asked during the time limit.
3. After they have finished, students should switch roles. Repeat this activity two more times so that
every student has a chance to play each role.

Modifications:
A. + difficulty Tell the Counter to count only questions when they are formed
grammatically. If there is a problem with the question, the Counter
should ask the Questioner to reformulate the question correctly before
proceeding to the next question.

B. + difficulty Have the Questioner use each of the question words that you write on
the board:
Who? What? Where? Why? How?

C. - difficulty Divide students into groups. Give the groups five or ten minutes to
+ competition come up with as many questions as they can. The group who creates
+ time the most questions wins. Then rearrange the students in new groups,
and tell them to ask one or two of questions developed by their former
group. The new group members should answer them.

23  
 
Index of Pre-Listening Activities for Traditional Song Units

Pre-Listening Activities

12. Picture Dictation

4. Stanza Creation

and Mind-Mapping
5. Unscramble the

10. Can You See

6. Find Someone

8. Brainstorming

/There Might Be
7. What Do You
1. Four Corners

Know About…?

11. It Could Be
Several Words

13. How Many

Questions …
What I See?
2. One Title,

Predictions
Sentences

9. Picture
3. Swat

Who…
Traditional
Song Units
1. I’ve Been Working
on the Railroad * * *
2. She’ll Be Coming
‘Round the Mountain * *B *
3. Michael, Row the
Boat Ashore * * *
4. On Top of Old
Smokey * * *
5. Home on the
Range * *D *
6. Yankee Doodle
* *D *
7. Red River Valley
*A *D *
8. Swing Low, Sweet
Chariot * * *
9. Clementine
*B * *
10. Billy Boy
*A * *
11. Oh! Susanna
* * *
12. Down in the
Valley * *C *
13. He’s Got the
Whole World in His * * *
Hands
Letters indicate which modification in the pre-listening activity applies

24  
 
  

Index of Pre-Listening Activities for American Rhythms Song Units

Pre-Listening Activities

8. Brainstorming & Mind

10. Can You See What

7. What Do You Know

11. It Could Be /There

2. One Title – Several

9. Picture Predictions

12. Picture Dictation

4. Stanza Creation

6. Find Someone
1. Four Corners

5. Unscramble

13. How Many

Questions…
Sentences
American

About…?

Might Be
3. Swat

Making
Who…
Words

I See?
Rhythms
Song Units
1. Lessons in Life
* *A *
2. Champion
*E *E *
3. Stronger &
Stronger * *B *
4. You Made Me
Laugh * * *
5. A Lot of Days Are
Gone * * *
6. Good Morning,
New Orleans *D * *
7. Simple Down
* * *
8. El Paso
* * *E
9. Not Afraid
* *E *
10. Can’t Stop
*A *A *
11. Into the Garden
*B *A *
12. Hey, Little
Minivan *C *B *D
13. Further Down
* * *A
14.Just Like
Everyday People *A * *
15. The Time Is Now
* * *
16. Peace
* *D *
17.Supertalents
* *A *D
Letters  indicate  which  modification  in  the  pre-­‐listening  activity  applies  
 

25  
 
Section 2: Listening Activities
After preparing students for the song with pre-listening activities, the next step is the actual listening
activity. Sometimes this step is referred to as while-listening or during-listening. When using songs or
listening activities, it is important that the students have a specific task to complete while listening.
Students can do many things while listening that help to focus their attention on particular aspects of the
songs. Among other things, students can be asked to listen:
• for particular sounds or words
• for detailed information
• for the main ideas

Teachers often wonder how many times songs should be played for students. The answer depends on
your own students’ needs and interests. You should play the song enough times that most students can
understand at least some of it, while still keeping the students interested and focused on the song.
Remember that you can play the song again during singing and post-listening activities.

Included below are a number of listening activities that can be used with almost any song. The amount of
time required will vary depending on the length of the song and the number of times you choose to play it.

Listening Activities:

Listening 1: Relax and Enjoy!.................................................................................................... 27

Listening 2: Mixed-Up Lyrics ..................................................................................................... 27
Listening 3: Mixed-Up Pictures ................................................................................................. 28
Listening 4: Dictation................................................................................................................. 29
Listening 5: Listening for Rhyming Words................................................................................. 30
Listening 6: Listening Gap-Fill................................................................................................... 31
Listening 7: Musical Words ....................................................................................................... 32
Listening 8: Song Bingo ............................................................................................................ 33
Listening 9: Find the Mistakes................................................................................................... 34
Listening 10: Did You Hear What I Heard? ................................................................................. 34

Included activities require very few or no materials. You can find examples of activities that require
specific materials in Parts II and III of the book, where there are specific lesson menus and
accompanying materials for all of the songs included on the Sing Out Loud CDs. For your reference, an
index of song units that model listening activities is provided at the end of this section (including
references to additional songs and song units that are available online).

26  
 
Listening 1: Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (the length of the song plus time for discussion)

Preparation and Materials: Prepare two to five questions to guide the class discussion about the song.
Some questions you might ask include the following:
• Does it seem like a happy or sad song?
• Does it seem to be a serious or humorous song?
• Do you like the song? Why or why not?
• Does the song remind you of any other songs you know?

Instructions:
1. Tell the students they are going to hear a song and that you want them to focus on how the song
makes them feel and what it reminds them of.
2. Play the song once.
3. Have a general class discussion about the students’ ideas and feelings using the questions that
you prepared.
4. After the discussion, select another activity for the second listening.

Listening 2: Mixed-Up Lyrics

Purpose: To listen for specific words or phrases, and make print and sound connections

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 25 minutes (depending on the length of the song)

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a handout that divides the song into sets of lines. Cut the sets
apart. For lower level classes, you may divide the song into four or five sections, and for more advanced
students, you can use every line or sentence. You may use only a section or part of the song. For the
standard procedure, you will need one copy of the handout for every three students in the class.

Instructions:
1. Divide students into groups of three.
2. Explain that you are going to give them the lyrics from the song, divided into sections. They
should read through the lyrics and put the sets into the order they think is correct. Give them
about five minutes to do this. Clarify any new vocabulary.
3. Tell students that as you play the song they should check their work and put the strips in the
correct order.
4. Play the song two or three times so the majority of students have the strips correctly ordered.
Then check their answers.

Modifications:

A. + movement Count how many lines there are in the song and prepare one strip of
- difficulty paper for each line of the song. Divide the class into groups with this
number of students in each group. (For example, if the song has 15
lines, then each group should have 15 students.) Give each student
one line of the song. Ask the students to stand up. Tell them that as
they listen to the song they need to stand in the correct order according
to their sentence and what they hear.

27  
 
 Modifications (cont.)

B. - groups Give students a page of lyrics (or put them up on the board), with the
+ difficulty lines out of order. Tell students to put them in the correct order as they
listen to the song by numbering the lines correctly.

C. + difficulty Find a picture to represent the meaning of each stanza. Divide students
+ materials into small groups. As you play the song, pause after each stanza to
+ pictures allow groups to discuss which picture might represent the theme of that
+ time section of the song. You may play each section more than once, if
needed. Repeat this procedure for all stanzas. Ask groups to compare
the order in which they put the pictures.

Listening 3: Mixed-Up Pictures

Purpose: To listen for specific words or ideas

Level: All Time: 15 – 25 minutes (depending on the length of the song)

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a set of large pictures related to the main ideas or keywords in the
lyrics and hang them on the board in random order. Put a letter under each picture: A, B, C, and so on.
This activity works best if you choose words that occur only one time in the song.

Instructions:
1. Show the pictures to the students. Make sure they know what the pictures represent and the
correct pronunciation of any vocabulary represented in the picture.
2. Tell the students to write the numbers 1 to X (depending on how many pictures you have) on a
piece of paper. For example, if you have ten pictures, students should number from one to ten.
3. Explain to the students that they are going to listen to the song, and they need to decide which
picture was mentioned first, second, third, and so on. They should write the correct letter next to
the number on their paper.
4. Play the song two or three times so that most of the students ordered the pictures correctly.
Check their answers.

Modifications:
A. + materials Divide students into groups. Photocopy and cut up the same set of
+ time pictures for each student (or each group). Follow Steps 1, 3, and 4
above and have students work individually or in groups to put the
(optional) pictures in order by arranging them on the desk.
+ groups
B. + difficulty Instead of using pictures, write the vocabulary words or phrases from
- materials the song on the board in random order. Follow Steps 1 and 2 above
- pictures and tell students to write down the words/phrases in the order that they
hear them. You can also mix pictures and words on the board.

C. + movement Prepare copies of the pictures that students can hold. Divide the
+ groups students into equal groups, each group containing the same number of
+ time students as pictures. Position each group in different parts of the room,
and ask each student in the group to hold up one of the pictures. As
they listen to the song, have the group members move around so that
they are standing in the same order in which the pictures are mentioned
in the song. At the end, compare the arrangement of each group.

28  
 
Listening 4: Dictation

Purpose: To listen for details, and write phrases and sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 25 minutes (depending on the length of the song)

Note to the Teacher: Students should not be able to view the lyrics of the song before the activity.

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions:
1. Play the song and pause after each line or couple of lines. Determine when to pause according
to the pace of the song.
2. Allow time for students to write what they heard before continuing with the song.
3. After listening to the song a couple of times in this manner, ask students to check what they
have written by comparing and discussing with others.
4. Ask the students to read the lines they heard, or write their lines on the board.
5. The class can then look at the board, compare what they have written, and, if there are
differences, try to decide which is the correct version.
6. Play the song again so that everyone can check their work.

Modifications:
A. + groups Divide the students into small groups. Allow a longer
+ difficulty section of the song to play (up to six or eight lines). Tell
+ time students to write down as much as they can understand.
Then give them time to work together to recreate the lyrics.

B. - difficulty Give each student a worksheet for writing the dictations.

+ scaffolding Provide some lines of the lyrics on the page, followed by a
+ materials blank line for the students to fill in. This allows students to
focus on producing accurate but shorter dictations.

C. + groups This activity can also be combined with Crazy Lyrics

+ difficulty (Singing / Music Activity 8). Divide students into groups,
+ writing and ask each group to come up with a new version of the
+ time song or stanza. Then, combine two groups together to
listen to and write down the other group’s new version of
the song as it is dictated.

D. - difficulty For longer songs, you may choose to use only one stanza
- time or the chorus of the song.

29  
 
Listening 5: Listening for Rhyming Words

Purpose: To listen for details, and recognize and discriminate between similar sounds

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 20 minutes (depending on the length of the song)

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a handout containing the song lyrics. Select three to five words
from the song that rhyme with other words in the song.

Instructions:
1. Write the words that you have selected on the board, pronounce them for the
students, and make the students practice saying the words.
2. Tell the students that they will listen to the song and identify words that rhyme with
the words you have written on the board by circling or underlining the rhyming words
on their copy of the song.
3. Working individually or in pairs, have the students listen to the song and identify
rhyming words.
4. Students may check their work with each other.
5. Play the song again so that everyone can double-check their answers.

Modifications:
A. + difficulty Ask students to write down all of the rhyming words that
- materials they hear without looking at the lyrics. Students can also
+ dictionary use a dictionary to check the spelling.

B. + extension After finding the rhyming words in the song, students can try to extend
+ competition their rhyming lists. Using a dictionary and/or working in groups,
+ time students can find as many words as possible that rhyme with the words
on the board. This activity may be carried out as a competition to see
(optional) whose list of rhyming words is the longest.
+ dictionary

C. + difficulty Ask students to identify all the rhyming words in the song,
or all the rhyming words that occur at the end of each line
of the song. Use this modification only for songs that have a
limited number of rhyming words.

D. - materials Write the lyrics on the board. Ask individual students to

come to the board to circle rhyming words as the class
listens to the song.

30  
 
Listening 6: Listening Gap-Fill

Purpose: To listen for details

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 30 minutes (depending on the length of the song)

Note to the Teacher: Traditional listening gap-fill activities require preparation of a handout with the
song’s lyrics printed on it. Some of the words in the song are omitted and replaced with gaps. The teacher
decides which words to remove based on whether you want the students to focus on an element of
grammar or particular vocabulary words.

Preparation and Materials: Create a gap-fill handout using the song lyrics (you may use only part of the
song). Make a copy of the handout for each student or group of students.

Instructions:
1. Distribute the gap-fill handout. Tell students to work individually or in pairs to guess the missing
words before listening to the song. Tell them to write their guesses in the blank spaces.
2. As you play the song, students check what they’ve written (or fill in the missing words if they have
not written anything in the space).
3. After students have listened several times, ask them to compare answers with a partner.
4. Then play the song again so that everyone can double-check their answers.

Modifications:
A. + difficulty Play the song once. Students may listen without guessing the missing
- time words beforehand. Then ask them to write down the missing words as
they hear the song for the second time.

B. + sound Prepare a gap-fill worksheet in which each gap contains two rhyming
discrimination words or two similar-sounding words. Have students listen and circle
the word they think is correct. Example:
Send it by (mail / rail).

C. + difficulty Create a gap-fill by removing all of the rhyming words in the song.
+ sound
discrimination

D. - difficulty Provide small pictures that the students can use to complete each gap
+ materials instead of writing. Or provide two small pictures in each gap and tell
+ pictures students to circle the picture that matches the word that they hear.

E. - materials Write the gap-fill activity on the board, providing a number for each gap.
Have students write down their answers for each gap on a piece of
paper.

F. - difficulty Provide a synonym or other rhyming word underneath each gap-fill line
as a hint for students.

31  
 
Listening 7: Musical Words

Purpose: To listen for and write specific words or phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 25 minutes (depending on the length of the song)

Preparation and Materials: Choose several places in the song where you plan to stop the music. If
possible, write down how many seconds between each stopping place to help you stop the music at the
same times the next time through. Optional: make a copy of the song lyrics for each student or group of
student.

Instructions:
1. Tell students that you are going to play a part of the song and then stop the song suddenly.
2. Explain that they need to write down as many words as they hear while the song is playing.
3. Play the song. Have the students write down any words they hear.
4. Stop the song suddenly and tell the students to stop writing.
5. Have students call out the words that they wrote down. On the board, generate a list of all of the
words they heard for that section of the song.
6. Play the next section of the song and repeat Steps 4 and 5. Repeat the procedure until you have
finished the rest of the song.
7. Listen to the song a second time, again stopping at the same places. As they listen to each
section, ask students to check the list on the board for each section, crossing off any words that
did not appear in that section. Optional: you can provide a copy of the song lyrics to help
students check the lists.

Modifications:
A. - difficulty Complete this activity with only one or two stanzas (or the chorus) of
- time the song.

B. + competition Divide students into small groups and let each group generate its own
+ groups list of words. After listening to the song one time, have each group
+ difficulty exchange lists with another group. Play the first section again, and tell
the groups to check their lists, giving one point for each correct word.
Record on the board each team’s score for that section. Repeat this
procedure with the remaining sections. The team with the most points
at the end wins.

C. + groups After listening to a section of the song, divide the students in groups.
+ main ideas Ask each group to generate a description of the theme or topic of that
section of the song.

D. + groups Divide students into groups and have each group write a paraphrase for
+ difficulty each line, stanza, or section of the song.
+ main ideas
+ time

32  
 
Listening 8: Song Bingo

Purpose: To listen for specific words, introduce vocabulary from the song, and make print and sound
connections

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (depending on the length of the song)

Preparation and Materials: Choose 20 – 30 words from the song and write them on the board in
random order.

Instructions:
1. Make sure that the students know the meaning and pronunciation of all of the words.
2. Tell the students to draw a blank 3 x 3 grid (see below) on their papers. Instruct them to write one
word from the board in each square.
3. Tell them that you are going to play the song and they should cross off the words in their grids
when they hear them. The first student to cross off all nine of their words should shout Bingo!
4. After the first student has finished, play the song once more so that the whole class can check
their answers.

Example: 3 x 3 grid

Modifications:
A. + difficulty Write five to ten verbs that occur in the song on the board. Tell students
+ verb forms to fill in their grids by choosing a verb and writing down one form of that
verb (for example, the past tense or the present tense in third person
singular).

B. + difficulty Instruct students to draw a larger grid and use more words to fill in the
+ time grid.

C. + difficulty Instead of using individual words, use phrases in the boxes. This works
+ phrases especially well for common word combinations.

D. + difficulty Tell students to select nine words for their grids. Instead of writing the
+ definitions word, have them write a definition for each word in the grid.
+ time
E. + materials Do this activity using pictures. Provide small pictures for each of the
+ pictures words, or get the students to draw their own pictures of the vocabulary
items in the grid.

33  
 
Listening 9: Find the Mistakes

Purpose: To listen for details and for specific words or phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 20 minutes (depending on the length of the song)

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a handout in which a number of the words from the song’s lyrics
have been changed. You will need at least one copy for every three students. For long songs, you may
use only part of the song or the chorus.

Instructions:
1. Divide students into small groups of three.
2. Tell the students that they are going to read the lyrics of a song as you play it, but there are a
number of mistakes in the written lyrics.
3. Explain that when they find a mistake they should try to fix it by writing down the correct word.
4. Hand out the mistake-filled lyrics. Allow students a couple of minutes to read through them.
5. Play the song two or three times so that the students can find most of the mistakes.
6. Play the song once more to check the answers.

Modifications:
A. - difficulty Tell students the number of mistakes contained on the worksheet as
well as the type of mistakes. Example:
There are two wrong words, two verb tense errors,
and two incorrectly formed plural nouns.

B. + difficulty Change a number of verbs from active into passive voice. Tell the
+ active/passive students to rewrite the lyrics in the active voice, and then compare their
voice revised version with the original song.

Listening 10: Did You Hear What I Heard?

Purpose: To listen for the main ideas and specific details

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (depending on the length of the song)

Note to the Teacher: Just as you can use questions for listening in class, you can use questions with
songs. These can be “gist” questions that focus on the main ideas or detail questions that focus on
specific pieces of information within the song. The difficulty of the questions should be tailored to your
students’ age and level.

Preparation and Materials: Write two or three questions about the main idea, theme, or story of the
song. If you wish, prepare some additional questions focusing on the details of the song. Write the
questions on the board, or prepare a handout containing the questions.

Instructions:
1. Tell the students that as you play the song, they should try to answer the questions on the board.
2. After the song is finished, ask the students to compare their answers in groups of three or four.
3. Play the song again, if needed.
4. Let the students work in groups and then check the answers with the whole class.
5. If an answer is wrong, help the students to understand why it is not correct.
6. If you have additional questions about specific details, use the same procedure.

34  
 
Modifications:
A. - difficulty Focus on main idea questions only.

B. + difficulty Focus on detail questions.

C. + difficulty Focus on inference questions.

D. + groups Divide students into groups and give each group a copy of one stanza
+ extension from the song. Have each group develop two or three questions for
+ questions another group to answer.
+ time

 
Index of Listening Activities for Traditional Song Units

Listening Activities

6. Listening Gap-Fill
1. Relax and Enjoy!

2. Mixed-Up Lyrics

7. Musical Words

10. Did You Hear

Rhyming Words
5. Listening for

What I Heard?
8. Song Bingo
3. Mixed-Up

4. Dictation

9. Find the
Mistakes
Pictures

Traditional
Song Units
1. I’ve Been Working
on the Railroad *               *   *    
2. She’ll Be Coming
‘Round the Mountain     *A,B   *       *        
3. Michael, Row
Your Boat Ashore *               *     *  
4. On Top of Old
Smokey   *       *C           *  
5. Home on the
Range     *     *C     *        
6. Yankee Doodle
*         *C         *    
7. Red River Valley
  *         *     *A      
8. Swing Low, Sweet
Chariot *   *     *              
9. Clementine
*     *A       *          
10. Billy Boy
    *     *C         *    
11. Oh! Susanna
  *         *         *  
12. Down in the
Valley       *       *   *      
13. He’s Got the
Whole World in His       *       *       *  
Hands
Letters indicate which modification in the listening activity applies

35  
 
  

Index of Listening Activities for American Rhythms Song Units

Listening Activities

10. Did You Hear What

3. Mixed-Up Pictures

9. Find the Mistakes

6. Listening Gap-Fill
1. Relax and Enjoy!

2. Mixed-Up Lyrics

7. Musical Words
Rhyming Words
5. Listening for

8. Song Bingo
4. Dictation
American

I Heard?
Rhythms
Song Units
1. Lessons in Life
*           *       *    
2. Champion
*       *         *      
3. Stronger &
Stronger *           *   *A        
4. You Made Me
Laugh *     *         *        
5. A Lot of Days Are
Done   *       *     *        
6. Good Morning
New Orleans *           *     *      
7. Simple Down
*   *                 *  
8. El Paso
*           *         *  
9. Not Afraid
  *         *   *        
10. Can’t Stop
*               *   *    
11. Into the Garden
    *   *D             *C  
12. Hey, Little
Minivan *     *A     *C            
13. Further Down
  *     *   *            
14. Just Like
Everyday People *     *B     *            
15. The Time Is Now
*               *     *  
16. Peace
*   *           *        
17. Supertalents
*               *     *  
Letters indicate which modification in the listening activity applies
 

36  
 
Section 3: Singing / Music Activities
Singing along to a song newly learned is not only fun, it can also be educational and pedagogically
sound. Students not only practice using grammatical chunks of language and pronouncing new words,
they also become more familiar and comfortable with rhythm and stress in English. In turn, this may help
their intonation skills. Thus, it is recommended that teachers include class time after the listening activities
for students to sing the song.

Some teachers may feel awkward asking students to sing in class, however, and some students really do
not like singing and do not want to sing in front of others. Here are some ways that you can help students
to relax and enjoy singing:
• Encourage students to tap their fingers on the desk to practice the rhythm, as other students sing.
• Ask students to listen and lip sync (move their lips according to the lyrics without actually singing).
• Refrain from asking students to stand up front. Allow them to stay at their desks to sing.
• Direct students to sit in a large circle with their backs to the center of the circle and their faces
looking outward. Students will not be able to see the other students and may be less self-
conscious about singing.
• Give students small instruments, such as drums or shakers, to focus on while singing.
Instructions for making several simple instruments are provided in this section.
• Allocate different movements to go with different lyrics, such as swaying back and forth when
they hear the word ‘wind.’
• Ask students to draw pictures to accompany the words in the song and hold up the correct picture
when they sing that word.

By having the students focus on something else, such as playing an instrument or doing particular
movements, students are less likely to be nervous and will enjoy singing.

Included below are nine singing activities that you can adapt to almost any song. Instructions for making
four homemade instruments are also included in this section.

Singing / Music Activities:

Singing 1: Sing Along With Me................................................................................................... 38

Singing 2: Disappearing Song.................................................................................................... 38
Singing 3: Old Song, New Song................................................................................................. 39
Singing 4: One Theme – Many Songs ....................................................................................... 40
Singing 5: Show Me the Word.................................................................................................... 41
Singing 6: Your Moves ............................................................................................................... 42
Singing 7: Drum and Instrument Circles .................................................................................... 43
Instrument 1: Can and Bottle Shaker .................................................................................. 44
Instrument 2: Rattle Stick .................................................................................................... 44
Instrument 3: Rain Stick ...................................................................................................... 45
Instrument 4: Bottle Xylophone ........................................................................................... 45
Singing 8: Crazy Lyrics .............................................................................................................. 46
Singing 9: The Halls Are Alive With the Sound of Singing ......................................................... 47

Although most of the activities included here require very few or no materials, students may feel more
comfortable singing if they can see the lyrics to the song written on the board or on a handout. Thus, the
lyrics to each song on the Sing Out Loud CDs are included on the second page of each song unit in Parts
II and III so that they may be photocopied as handouts.

Examples of activities that require specific materials appear in Parts II and III when these activities are
applied to specific songs. For your reference, an index of song units that model these activities is
provided at the end of this section (including references to additional songs and song units online).

37  
 
Singing 1: Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 10 – 20 minutes (depending on the length of the song)

Note to the Teacher: This technique is especially useful in lower level classes or in mixed ability
classes. Sometimes students can become overwhelmed with the pace of a song and lose their place. If
this happens, it can be difficult for them to catch up. Having the teacher indicate on the board where they
are in the song can help.

Preparation and Materials: Write the lyrics on the board or on a large poster.

Instructions:
1. Practice singing the song with the students. While singing, use a large stick, ruler, or your hand to
point on the board to the words as they are sung so that students don’t lose their place in the
song.
2. If some students learn the song quickly, they can come to the front and point to the words on the
board. Different students can take turns.

Modifications:
A. - difficulty If the melody of the song is a bit difficult, start by humming it. Ask the
+ time students to hum along as you hum the first time through the song. The
second time work with them on singing the refrain and hum the
remaining verses. Next, depending on the difficulty of the song, you
may introduce one or two verses.

B. + groups Depending on the song, you can divide the students into call-and-
+ time response groups where one group or person sings a line and the other
group responds with the next line. For example, in the song Billy Boy,
one group could sing the mother’s lines and the other group could
respond with Billy’s lines. This approach also works well when there is
repetition in the song.

C. - time For long songs, sing only one stanza or section of the song.
Alternatively, you can sing along with the chorus each time it appears in
the song.

D. + groups If the song contains long lines, divide students into groups and assign
+ time each group one or two lines to sing.

Singing 2: Disappearing Song

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation, and to recall words and phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes (depending on the length of the song)

Note to the Teacher: This activity involves singing the song multiple times and asking students to recall
words that you have erased from the song’s lyrics. The number of words that you choose to erase and
the pace with which you remove them will depend on the length of the song, the difficulty of the lyrics, and
the level of your students. You do not need to erase a high percentage of words for the activity to be
engaging and challenging. For long songs, stop after Step 4 while 50% of the words still remain.

38  
 
Preparation and Materials: Write the lyrics on the board.

Instructions:
1. Practice singing the song with the students, line by line.
2. Erase approximately 10% of the words. Draw a blank space under each erased word. Practice
singing the song again with the students. Make sure that they can remember and sing the
missing words.
3. Erase another 10% of the words and follow the procedure in Step 2.
4. Erase an additional 20 to 30%, so that only about 50% of the words remain. Practice singing the
song again.
5. Finally, erase an additional 20 to 30% so that about 20% of the words remain. Sing the song one
final time.

Modifications:
A. - difficulty Erase only key content words from the song. Replace the written form
+ materials of the word with a picture of the word to help students remember the
+ pictures word.

B. + groups Divide students into groups of four or five. Give each group a copy of a
+ materials different stanza of the song. Ask groups to decide which words to
+ time delete from the song by cutting the word out or by coloring over words
with a pen or marker. Then tell the groups to exchange stanzas and
sing their new stanza.

C. + groups Divide students into groups. Give each group one or two lines to sing.
- difficulty

Singing 3: Old Song, New Song

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: 2 and above Time: 40 – 55 minutes

Note to the Teacher: This activity may be extended over several class sessions. Session 1 (Steps 1 –
5): 25 – 30 minutes; Session 2 (Step 6): 15 – 25 minutes, depending on how many groups there are.

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a handout with the lyrics of the song, or write the lyrics on the
board.

Instructions:
1. Discuss with the students what types of music they like and which ones are currently popular,
such as rap, hip hop, jazz, and so on. Talk about the special features of these types of music.
2. Divide students into groups of three to five based on their favorite types of music. You can have
more than one group for each type.
3. Give students the lyrics. Play the song (more than once, if necessary) and ask students to follow
along with the lyrics.
4. Tell the students that you want them to sing the same song with the same words, but in the new
genre. Students may use the lyrics to help them learn the song.
5. Divide the students in groups to discuss their ideas and prepare their song. You may wish to give
them time to practice either in class or as homework.
6. Ask each group to sing in their new song style for the class. You can encourage the groups to
teach the other students their new song style. Students could vote on the best new version.

39  
 
Modifications:
A. + difficulty Instead of changing the type of music, tell students to adapt the lyrics
+ creativity and explain how they should change the song. For example: to ‘make it
more fun,’ ‘make it happier,’ or ‘make it sadder.’ Each group can be
encouraged to sing their new song for the group.

B. + creativity Ask the students to think of their favorite singer or to think of a very
famous singer. Tell the students in the group to practice singing the
song imitating their famous singer. Example: Sing the song like
Michael Jackson might have sung it.

C. - difficulty Have students complete this activity just using the chorus or another
- time section of the song.

D. + difficulty Instead of changing the type of music or individual words, the students
+ creativity could write a new stanza for the song. Have them develop a sequel to
+ time the story told by the song. Then write a new stanza to tell that story.

Singing 4: One Theme – Many Songs

Purpose: To create a song, and practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: 3 and above Time: 60 – 75 minutes (depending on the number of songs to be performed)

Note to the Teacher: This activity may extend over several class sessions. Session 1 (Steps 1 – 2): 25
– 30 minutes; Session 2 (Step 2): 15 – 20 minutes; Session 3 (Steps 4 – 5): 20 – 25 minutes (depending
on the number of songs to be performed).

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions:
1. Divide students into small groups of four.
2. Tell the students they should work together to write original lyrics for a two-stanza song related to
the theme of the song they just learned. They can use the same melody or choose a different
one; however, they should avoid using the same words that were in the song they learned.
3. Give the students time to rehearse their songs.
4. Have each group perform their song. Depending on the level of the students, they can explain
why they chose those lyrics and melody.
5. This activity can be made into a contest with the students in the class voting for the best song.
Applause or a small reward can be given to the winning group.

Modifications:
A. + difficulty If the original song contains many rhyming words, tell students to find
+ rhyming and use words that rhyme as they compose the lyrics for their new
song.

B. + scaffolding Create a handout that will help guide students in the creation of their
+ materials stanza. Include information such as how many lines to create, and how
many syllables the students should use in order to mimic the stress
pattern in the melody of the original song.

40  
 
 Modifications (cont.)

C. + scaffolding Provide students with a list of words or phrases as a “bank” to help

them generate ideas for the new lyrics. This bank can be provided on a
handout, or you can generate the word bank as a class by
brainstorming possible words that are related to the theme of the song
and writing them on the board. Elicit nouns, verbs, adjectives, and
adverbs that students can use.

D. - time Ask each group to create one new line for the new song. Then, as a
class, combine the lines into a stanza.

Singing 5: Show Me the Word

Purpose: To make print and sound connections, and learn vocabulary from the song

Level: All Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Provide paper or cards for the students to write words on. Choose
approximately 20 words for the students to focus on and write them on the board.

Instructions:
1. Divide the students into small groups. They will divide the words among them. Example: for a
group of five, each student will have four different word cards.
2. Have students copy the 20 words onto 20 separate pieces of paper or cards. Tell them to
distribute the words so that each student has an equal number of word cards.
3. Tell the students that the class will sing the song as they sit in their groups. Whenever students
hear and sing any of the word on their cards they need to raise the corresponding card above
their heads.
4. Play the song and ask students to sing along, raising their words whenever they sing those
words.
5. To make it more competitive, you could select a class judge to watch the groups and make sure
they raise the correct words.

Modifications:
A. - difficulty Select only ten different words. Distribute two words to each student.
+ materials Tell the students to draw a picture of the two words assigned to them.
+ art Then play the song and follow Steps 3-4 above.

B. + phrases Instead of individual words, you can provide phrases for students to
write down, sing, and hold up.

C. + movement Students need to position their chairs around the room, spreading out
so that they can easily jump up and sit back down. As students raise
the word cards above their heads, they also jump in the air with their
cards. Have a judge determine which students can do this the fastest.

D. - difficulty Prepare a large picture to represent each word that you write on the
+ materials board. Hang the picture on the board next to the written word. Have
+art students copy the word, draw a similar picture, or do both on their word
cards.

41  
 
  
Singing 6: Your Moves

Purpose: To learn vocabulary from the song, and represent word meanings with actions

Level: All Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Choose a set of 10 – 15 keywords or phrases from the song that can be
represented with motions or gestures. If a few words are repeated often in the song, then choose fewer
keywords or phrases. Prepare a handout containing the lyrics of the song or write the lyrics on the board.
Circle the keywords that you have selected. For long songs, you may choose to use only one stanza, one
section, or the chorus of the song.

Instructions:
1. Give students a handout of the lyrics or show them the lyrics on the board.
2. Elicit possible motions that could be associated with each keyword or phrase. Example: Possible
motions for the word tall
a) students reach their hands up straight toward the sky, or
b) students hold one hand up at eye level with the palm facing the floor
3. After the students have suggested a number of different mimes for the keyword or phrase, then
ask the class to choose the one they like the best.
4. Practice that mime and then go on to the next keyword until each keyword has a mime. Practice
all of them so that students can remember them.
5. Play the song and have the students sing along and do the correct mime when they hear the
word or phrase.

Modifications:
A. + difficulty Go through the song line by line and have students offer an
+ time interpretation of the meaning of the lines or stanzas. Ask students to
think of a mime or series of mimes to represent those interpretations.
Play the song and get students to perform the mimes.

B. + groups Divide students into small groups that need to come up with their own
+ difficulty mimes for the selected words. Ask each group to perform their version
+ competition of the song, and let the class vote on the best performance.
+ time

C. + groups Choose two groups to compete against each other. Then have students
+ difficulty perform the mimes at the same time and vote for the group that
+ competition performs the correct mimes most often.
+ time
D. - materials If students have sung the song before, write the keywords or phrases
on the board (without providing a handout with the lyrics). Follow the
steps above to elicit movements, and then sing the song, pointing to
each phrase on the board as it is sung.

42  
 
  
Singing 7: Drum and Instrument Circles

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: All Time: 10 – 30 minutes (depending on the length of the song)

Note to the Teacher: Instructions for making four homemade instruments, which can be used with this
activity, follow these instructions. Instruments can be made during a class period before you want to sing
the song.

Preparation and Materials: Collect and bring in different types of drums or other rhythm instruments
(such as can and bottle shakers, rattle sticks, rain sticks, and bottle xylophones). If this is not possible,
then students can clap their hands or tap on the desks.

Instructions:
1. Ask students to stand or sit in a circle. Give each one a drum. If there are not enough drums, they
can share or some students can clap their hands or tap on the desks.
2. Provide a model of how the song can be sung with the beats by tapping out a few words or a line
of the song. Focus on the coordination of word stress and the drum beats. Ask the students to
repeat the model back to you using the instruments.
3. Go through the song one time, pausing periodically to allow students to get back together.
4. As the students become more comfortable with the idea of coordinating the stress and beats, you
can introduce different speeds and rhythms.
5. After practicing, sing the song one more time and have students play the drums or instruments
while they sing. If you wish, ask students to take turns being the drum circle leader.

Modifications:
A. + materials Invite students to bring in their own rhythm instruments from home on
the day you wish to sing the song. You can sing the song along with
your new class orchestra.

B. + materials Before the song lesson, do a separate lesson on making instruments.

+ time Give different sets of directions to different groups on how to make
simple instruments. Photocopy the example directions on the following
two pages. Either bring in the materials that the students need or ask
them to bring in materials from home. Finally, after the instruments
have been constructed, the groups can play them while singing along.

C. + difficulty Have some students follow the steps above while others sing along
with the song.

43  
 
 Homemade Instruments

Instrument 1: Can and Bottle Shaker (Maracas)

Materials:
• An empty metal drink can or plastic/glass bottle
• Small pebbles, dried beans, or uncooked rice
• Paper
• Tape

Instructions:

Wash out the can or bottle and let it dry completely. Put a small number of pebbles (or dried
beans or uncooked rice) in the bottle. Cover the top or the hole with your hand. Shake it and
listen to the sound. Decide whether you need to add more pebbles/beans/rice. Cut the paper
into a circle large enough to cover the top of the can or bottle. Place the paper circle on the top
and tape it into place to seal the pebbles/beans/rice into your shaker. Decorate the outside of
the shaker with pictures or stickers.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Instrument 2: Rattle Stick

Materials:
• Six metal bottle caps
• A stick, approximately 6 – 12 inches (about 15 – 30 centimeters) long
• One large nail and three small nails
• A hammer
• Markers or paint to decorate the stick (optional) metal bottle cap

Instructions:

Using a large nail, hammer a hole into the center of each bottle
cap. Next, using a smaller nail, fasten two bottle caps (smooth
sides facing each other) on the side of the stick near one end. The
two caps should be nailed in loosely so that they rattle in a similar
fashion to the bells in the picture. Then nail the next two bottle
caps under the first set (so that they are not touching the first set),
and nail the final two under that. If you wish, decorate the handle
of the stick.

44  
 
Instrument 3: Rain Stick

Materials:
• One cardboard tube, any length
• 20 – 30 nails that are as long as the diameter of the
tube
• One to two cupfuls of dried beans or pebbles
• Fabric and paper to cover the ends and the outside
of the tube
• Glue
• Tape

Instructions:

Starting at one end of the tube, gently hammer or push nails into the spiral seam of the tube.
The nails should go across the tube to the other side, but they should not stick out the
other side. Turn the tube and continue pushing in nails following the spiral pattern. If the
tube does not have a seam, push the nails along the length of the tube in a spiral
pattern (pictured at the right). The nails should be about one-half inch or one inch apart.
Cover one end of the tube with paper and tape it closed. Pour enough beans or pebbles
into the tube to fill it about half way. Cover the other end of the tube with paper and tape
it closed. Now wrap the entire tube in paper or fabric and glue it down so that the nails
do not come out. Slowly tilt the rain stick back and forth. Listen to the beans or pebbles
pouring past the nails, like rain on a metal roof.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Instrument 4: Bottle Xylophone

Materials:
• Five or six glass bottles
• Water
• A stick or spoon to tap the bottles

Instructions:

Put a different amount of water into each bottle to create six distinct sounds. When you tap each
bottle you can produce a different tone.

45  
 
Singing 8: Crazy Lyrics

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words, use different parts of speech, and think about why words are
appropriate and inappropriate in particular contexts

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Note to the Teacher: This works well as a follow-up or extension activity after students have practiced
singing the song using one of the other activities in this section.

Preparation and Materials: Provide each group with a “crazy lyrics” handout. To create a crazy lyrics
handout, first underline a number of keywords (nouns, verbs, adjectives, and adverbs) in the lyrics of the
song. Under each underlined word, write its part of speech. Then erase or white out the actual word so
that you have lyrics with blank spaces with the part of speech printed under each blank. Example:

A _______________ was in her mouth; a ________________ was in her eye.

(noun - thing) (noun - thing)

I said “I come from _______________; Susanna, don’t you ____________!”

(noun – place) (verb)

Instructions:
1. Divide the students into groups of four and assign one recorder per group. Give a copy of the
crazy lyrics to the recorder and tell him/her not to show the paper to the other members of the
group.
2. Tell the recorder to ask the other group members to suggest the different parts of speech or types
of words that are missing. Example:
Give me a noun, a thing, and one team member says cat;
Give me another thing, and another team member says banana;
Give me a place, and one member says France; and
Give me a verb, and one member says teach.

The recorder then writes the words the members say into the appropriate blanks. For the
example above, this could be:
A cat was in her mouth; a banana was in her eye.
I said I come from France; Susanna, don’t you teach!

3. The recorder can now read the new crazy song to the group.
4. Play the song so that the group can practice singing the new crazy song. If they wish, encourage
the groups to sing their crazy songs for the whole class.

Modifications:
A. - difficulty Provide students with a list of potential words to use in the song.
+ scaffolding Include 20 – 30 potential words, and make sure to include several
- time words for each of the types of words indicated on the crazy lyrics
handout.

B. - difficulty Provide pictures that students can use to complete the new song.
+ materials Pictures can either be provided in the blanks, or on a separate handout.
+ pictures
C. + difficulty Remove the verbs from the song. Underneath the blank line, write the
+ verb forms tense in which the verb should occur. You can change the tense
requirement to make the lyrics seem funnier. Or you can practice
forming plural/singular and present/past tense verbs.

46  
 
Singing 9: The Halls Are Alive With the Sound of Singing

Purpose: To write and perform dramatic dialogue

Level: 3 and above

Time: 50 – 70 minutes (more time may be necessary for rehearsing and performing, depending on the
number of groups)

Note to the Teacher: A musical is a dramatic play with songs in it. Examples: The Sound of Music,
West Side Story, Cats, and The Lion King. This activity may extend over several class sessions. Session
1 (Steps 1 – 3): 20 – 25 minutes; Session 2 (Steps 4 – 5): 30 – 45 minutes.

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the song’s lyrics for each group or write the lyrics on the
board.

Instructions:
1. Write the word ‘musical’ on the board and ask students what it means. Discuss or explain the
concept and list any famous musicals that they know. Teach (or model!) the phrase and idea of
“bursting into song.”
2. Tell students that they are going to write a short three- to five-minute play. Make sure students
have a copy of the lyrics. They must use at least six lines from a song they have learned in class
and integrate those lines into their play. Tell them that when they are finished writing the play they
will perform it for the class. They will speak the new lines that they wrote and sing the lines they
used from the song.
3. Divide the students into small groups of four or five. Allow them time to write their play. Help them
with their different drafts.
4. Give the students time to rehearse their plays during or outside of class.
5. Ask each group to perform their musical for the class. The other classmates can listen and
evaluate the musical based on some agreed criteria. Examples: the funniest, most creative, most
carefully pronounced, most dramatic, etc.

Modifications:
A. - difficulty Lower level classes can be encouraged to create a melodrama based
+ mime on the song. Each group can mime what is happening during the story
- time that the song tells. Take turns having one group of students sing the
song while another group performs their mimes.

B. - music This activity can also be done as a play instead of a musical. Select a
main theme from the song that would lend itself to different dramatic
interpretations. Example: a girl breaking up with her boyfriend. Ask the
students in groups to write a short skit on the theme, to practice and
perform it for the rest of the class.

47  
 
Index of Singing / Music Activities for Traditional Song Units

Singing / Music Activities

1. Sing Along With

Instrument Circles
3. Old Song, New

Sound of Singing
4. One Theme—

9. The Halls Are

2. Disappearing

5. Show Me the

8. Crazy Lyrics
6. Your Moves

Alive With the

Many Songs

7. Drum and
Traditional

Word
Song

Song
Song Units Me
1. Working on the
Railroad     *   *         *    
2. She’ll Be Coming
‘Round the Mountain *B     *A       *        
3. Michael, Row
Your Boat Ashore   *         *   *      
4. On Top of Old
Smokey *     *A             *  
5. Home on the
Range   *     *         *    
6. Yankee Doodle
          *   *     *  
7. Red River Valley
  *       *         *  
8. Swing Low, Sweet
Chariot *C   *   *              
9. Clementine
    *     *   *        
10. Billy Boy
*B   *         *        
11. Oh! Susanna
  *       *     *      
12. Down in the
Valley *         *       *    
13. He’s Got the
Whole World in His     *D   *       *      
Hands
Letters  indicate  which  modification  in  the  singing  activity  applies  

48  
 
  
Index of Singing / Music Activities for American Rhythms Song Units

Singing / Music Activities

7. Drum and Instrument

3. Old Song, New Song

4. One Theme —Many

1. Sing Along With Me

2. Disappearing Song

5. Show Me the Word

9. The Halls Are Alive

With the Sound of
8. Crazy Lyrics
6. Your Moves
American

Singing
Circles
Songs
Rhythms
Song Units
1. Lessons in Life
*   *B       *A          
2. Champion
  *     *   *B          
3. Stronger &
Stronger *C     *B             *  
4. You Made Me
Laugh   *   *           *    
5. A Lot of Days Are
Gone *C   *           *      
6. Good Morning
New Orleans *B   *   *              
7. Simple Down
*         *D   *A        
8. El Paso
*       *B       *      
9. Not Afraid
*D       *           *  
10. Can’t Stop
*B           *   *      
11. Into the Garden
*C     *C       *        
12. Hey, Little
Minivan *C         *       *    
13. Further Down
    *   *C         *    
14. Just Like
Everyday People *     *           *    
15. The Time Is Now
*       *     *        
16. Peace
  *       *     *      
17. Supertalents
*B,C       *C       *      
Letters  indicate  which  modification  in  the  singing  activity  applies  
 
 

49  
 
Section 4: Post-listening Activities
While it is possible to stop after doing only pre-listening, listening and singing activities, it can be very
valuable to extend the instructional sequence to include a number of post-listening activities to increase
the educational value of the song. These activities can focus mainly on one skill (speaking, writing, or
reading), or they can integrate several skills.

The post-listening activities included in this book are divided into three main sections: 1) Speaking, 2)
Reading, and 3) Writing. Although these activities are categorized by one particular skill, they often
integrate multiple skills.

The post-listening activities below can be used with almost any song. Select several activities from these
sections based on your student’s needs and interests. Experiment by using different activities with
different students, different levels, and different songs. Most of the activities require very few or no
materials. If they do require specific materials, you can find them in Parts II and III of the book, which
provides specific lesson menus and accompanying materials for the songs on the Sing Out Loud CDs.

Section 4.A: Post-listening – Speaking Activities

Activities to practice speaking are important in helping students use English for communicative purposes.
The activities in this section are intended to give students a communicative task that allows them to
produce extended spoken language. While some activities ask students to produce spontaneous speech,
other allow for more planning time and scaffolding before students are expected to speak.

Included activities require the students to rely upon and practice a range of critical thinking and personal
interaction skills, such as working together to make choices, to find out and summarize classmates’
opinions, and to be creative with language.

Following are five activities that students can do to practice their speaking skills. An index of model units
is provided at the end of this section.

Post-listening – Speaking Activities:

Post-listening – Speaking 1: What Do YOU Think? ................................................................... 50

Post-listening – Speaking 2: Act the Part................................................................................... 52
Post-listening – Speaking 3: Small Group Discussion and Summary........................................ 53
Post-listening – Speaking 4: Silly Story...................................................................................... 54
Post-listening – Speaking 5: I’d Like to Ask You About….......................................................... 55

Post-listening - Speaking 1: What Do YOU Think?

Purpose: To ask and answer questions, and summarize and present information

Level: 3 and above Time: 40 – 50 minutes

Note to the Teacher: This activity may be extended over several class sessions. Session 1 (Steps 1 –
4): 20 – 25 minutes; Session 2 (Steps 5 – 8): 20 – 25 minutes.

Preparation and Materials: Pre-teach the ideas of surveys and results. Explain the purpose of a survey,
the types of questions to be asked, and how to calculate and present results.

50  
 
 Instructions:
1. Divide the students into small groups of four or five.
2. If needed, review what a survey is, which involves asking a set of questions to a large number of
people and then summarizing the answers in some sort of visual chart, diagram, or list.
3. Tell the students that they are going to conduct a class survey based on the song (or based on
music in general). Tell them that in their groups they will need to write at least five questions. You
may need to help by giving them some suggestions. (See examples below.)
4. Tell the students that they can work together in groups to write the questions, but that every
student will need a copy of the questions. Give the students 10 – 15 minutes to plan their survey
and write their questions.
5. When the groups are finished preparing questions, tell the students that everyone in the group
must now ask four or five other students (depending on the class size) to answer the questions.
6. Make sure students write down their answers carefully.
7. After the students have finished, get them to sit back down in their original groups. Tell them they
will present their findings to the class (either orally or visually by means of a poster). You may
wish to teach language related to presenting findings. Examples:
six out of ten students…; the majority of the class likes…;
most of the students…; 20 percent of the students felt…
8. When they are ready, allow each group to make an oral presentation or display their posters.

Some sample survey ideas:

1. Personal opinions about the song. Example questions:
Did you like the song?
How did it make you feel?
Why did you feel that way?
2. The theme of the song. Example questions for the theme love:
Have you ever had your heart broken?
How many times?
Are you romantic?
3. Their general tastes in music. Example questions:
Do you like pop music?
Which pop musicians do you like?
What’s your favorite song?

Modifications:
A. - movement Have groups pair up and exchange questions. After Step 4 above, put
- time two groups together. Each member of Group A should ask a member of
Group B one of the prepared questions and write down each person’s
response. Then Group B asks Group A one question. Continue to ask
and answer questions in this manner.

B. - movement Get students to develop multiple-choice survey questions. Have the

- time groups take turns coming to the front of the classroom to ask their
questions. Have the class choose responses by raising their hands.
After all groups have asked their questions and recorded the answers
the class gave them, allow the groups five minutes to summarize their
results. Finally, ask each group to present their results orally.

C. - difficulty Prepare the surveys for the students. Distribute them to the groups,
- time who will use these surveys to ask questions, summarize results, and
eventually make an oral presentation.

D. + extension Have students prepare (during class or as homework) charts or graphs

+ charts/graphs that display their survey results for use in an oral presentation.
+ time

51  
 
Post-listening - Speaking 2: Act the Part

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation, and use critical thinking skills to resolve a problem

Level: 3 and above Time: 25 – 30 minutes

Note to the Teacher: It is not necessary for every group to perform their role-play in front of the class.
Groups can work on their own trying to solve the problem and then report on what they discussed.

Preparation and Materials: Choose a situation that is related to the theme of the song, and that
contains some sort of problem that the students need to resolve through their chosen roles. Prepare a set
of cards that describe a situation in which the students might find themselves and possible roles the
students will play when solving the situation.

Instructions:
1. Briefly introduce the situation that will be the focus of the role-play.
2. Tell students that they will be divided in groups and each member of the group will be assigned a
different role.
3. Divide the students into groups according to the number of people in the role-play. For example, if
there are three roles, the class should be divided into three groups.
4. Distribute the role cards so that everyone in the same group has the same role card. For
example, if you have roles for mother, daughter, and father, then you will have all of the mothers
in one group, all of the daughters in a second group, and all of the fathers in a third. Give the
students time to discuss their roles and to brainstorm things they might say.
5. Have the students in each group count off so that each student is assigned a number. Then tell
all of the 1’s to sit together, all of the 2’s to sit together, all of the 3’s, and so on. In this way there
will be one person representing each role in each new group. For example, one group would
contain one mother, one daughter and one father.
6. Give the students a specific amount of time to conduct the role-play. Remind them again of what
the situation is and what problem or issue they are trying to resolve.
7. Each person acts according to his or her role as they discuss the situation or problem. Go around
monitoring the groups and helping them if they have any difficulties.
8. When the time is up, lead a class discussion that focuses on the situation or problem. Ask each
group if they resolved the problem and how they resolved it.

Modifications:
A. - difficulty Give the students a partially completed script or skit to use in the role-
+ scaffolding play.
+ materials
- time

B. - difficulty Provide simple sentences/phrases that students should try to

+ scaffolding incorporate into the role-play in a creative way. You can use
+ materials lines/phrases adapted from the song or develop your own.

C. + extension Have several groups perform their role-plays for the class. Then hold a
+ time class discussion about the similarities and differences between the role-
plays.

D. + difficulty Do not provide role cards. Instead, briefly describe the roles orally and
- materials allow students to develop the roles in their groups.
+ creativity

52  
 
  
Post-listening - Speaking 3: Small Group Discussion and Summary

Purpose: To think critically and express opinions

Level: 3 and above Time: 25 – 35 minutes

Note to the Teacher: The quality of class discussions often depends in part on the quality of the
questions. Make sure that the questions you select are not too difficult for your students. If students do
not have sufficient language to discuss the topic, they will not be able to complete the task.

Preparation and Materials: Prepare discussion questions that are related to the theme of the song and
write them on the board.

Instructions:
1. Divide the students into small groups of four or five. A larger group will make it difficult for all
students to contribute to the discussion.
2. Tell the students their task is to discuss the questions. You can assign them all of the questions
or assign different questions to different groups.
3. When all groups have finished their discussions, the teacher can ask each group to comment on
one aspect: the most surprising opinion, the funniest opinion, or the similarities and differences
among groups.

Modifications:
A. + extension Select one member of each group to record the group’s comments.
+ summary That person will make a summary report to the whole class after all
+ time questions have been discussed. When all groups have finished their
discussions, ask the students who were appointed to give summaries
to speak to whole class. You may limit the oral summary to one or two
questions so that the summaries do not become too long. The teacher
and other groups can comment on the opinions that were expressed
by members of other groups.

B. + equal participation Give each student in the group three small slips of paper. When
someone speaks, that person must put one of their slips of paper into
the middle. Whenever a student has used up their three slips, then he
or she is not allowed to speak again until the other group members
have also used up their three slips of paper.

C. - difficulty Create controversial statements with which students can agree or

- time disagree instead of open-ended discussion questions. Students are to
explain aloud why they agree or disagree with these statements.

D. + extension Give students a topic and have groups develop their own discussion
+ difficulty questions. Then these questions are exchange among groups.
+ questions Proceed to follow Steps 1-3 above.
+ time

53  
 
Post-listening - Speaking 4: Silly Story

Purpose: To tell stories, and practice using new vocabulary in sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Choose 15 – 18 key content words from the songs (either verbs or nouns)
and write them on small cards. Each group of five students will need one set of cards.

Instructions:
1. Divide students into groups of five. Have them sit around a table or move their desks to face each
other. Place the pack of cards face down in a stack on the table or desk, so that the students
cannot see the words.
2. Tell the students that they are going to tell a story using the words on the cards. The first person
in the group selects the top card and makes up a sentence using that word. Example: If the word
is rain, the first student might say, Once upon a time a little girl was walking in the rain.
3. The second person then selects the next card. That person must continue the story by making up
a sentence using the word on the card. Example: If the word is yellow, the person might say,
The little girl was wearing a yellow coat.
4. Students continue telling the circle story until they have gone through all of the cards.
5. At the end of the activity, you can ask a few groups to tell what happened in their stories.

Modifications:
A. + extension Ask the students to write down their stories. Post all of the stories on
+ writing the walls around the classroom. Ask the students to read the other
+ time stories and vote on which one is the best, the funniest, or the most
creative.

B. - difficulty Include both a small picture and the written word on each card.
+ scaffolding
+ materials
+ pictures

C. - difficulty Give each group a smaller set of words. Have students write down their
+ writing sentences/short stories. Have each group share their short story. Then,
+ time as a class, come up with transition sentences that link all of the short
stories together into one longer story.

D. + humor To make a really silly story, have the first student follow Step 2 above.
Then, have the second student choose a card, but this time they must
repeat the sentence that the first student came up with, replacing one
word in the sentence with the word on the card. Repeat until all of the
word cards have been used, and a really strange story results.

54  
 
Post-listening - Speaking 5: I’d Like to Ask You About…

Purpose: To ask and answer questions

Level: All Time: 40 – 50 minutes

Note to the Teacher: This activity may be extended over several class sessions. Session 1 (Steps 1 – 3):
20 – 25 minutes; Session 2 (Steps 4 – 5): 20 – 25 minutes.

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions:
1. Initiate a general class discussion about the characters in the song:

Who are they? Male or female? Old or young?

2. Ask the students which character they think is the most interesting. Write that character’s name
on the board. If the character doesn’t have a name in the song, then elicit an appropriate name
for the character.
3. Divide the students into pairs. Tell them that they are radio reporters and they are going to
interview the song character for a popular radio show. Tell them to compose between eight and
ten questions to ask the character. Give the students about 15 minutes to do this.
4. When they are finished, tell one student in the pair to be the reporter and the other student the
character to be interviewed. Instruct the reporters to stand up, walk around the room, and find
one ‘sitting’ character to interview. The reporter should sit with their new partner, and together the
new pair carries out the interview with one student asking the questions and the other student
answering as if he/she were the song character.
5. If you like, at the end, ask the students to go back to their original pairs where they can switch
roles and the characters have a chance to be the reporters.

Modifications:
A. - difficulty Generate the questions as a whole class instead of having students
- time create the questions in pairs.

B. - difficulty Have students come up with only four or five questions.

- time

C. - movement Divide students into groups of four to six students instead of pairs.
- time Have groups generate the questions. Then, have one member of each
group serve as the radio reporter, and assign each of the remaining
students a character from the song. Complete the interviews in the
small groups without moving the reporters.

D. + extension Have each group write a report that summarizes how different
+ difficulty characters responded to the questions.
+ writing
+ time

55  
 
 Index of Post-listening Speaking Activities for Traditional Song Units

Speaking Activities

1. What Do YOU

5. I’d Like to Ask

3. Small Group
2. Act the Part

4. Silly Story
Discussion

You About
Think?
Traditional
Song Units
1. Working on the
Railroad       *    
2. She’ll Be Coming
‘Round the Mountain         *  
3. Michael, Row
Your Boat Ashore         *  
4. On Top of Old
Smokey     *      
5. Home on the
Range *          
6. Yankee Doodle
    *      
7. Red River Valley
  *        
8. Swing Low, Sweet
Chariot       *B    
9. Clementine
  *        
10. Billy Boy
        *  
11. Oh! Susanna
      *    
12. Down in the
Valley       *    
13. He’s Got the
Whole World in His *          
Hands
Letters  indicate  which  modification  in  the  speaking  activity  applies  

56  
 
 Index of Post-listening Speaking Activities for American Rhythms Units

Speaking Activities

1. What Do YOU Think?

5. I’d Like to Ask You

3. Small Group
2. Act the Part

4. Silly Story
Discussion
American
Rhythms

About
Song Units
   
1. Lessons in Life
  *    
 
2. Champion
*        
3. Stronger &
Stronger
     
*    
4. You Made Me
Laugh
      *    
5. A Lot of Days Are
Gone
      *    
6. Good Morning
New Orleans *B      
   
   
7. Simple Down
*      
     
8. El Paso
  *  
 
9. Not Afraid
  *      
 
10. Can’t Stop
*B        
 
11. Into the Garden
      *  
12. Hey, Little    
Minivan *      
13. Further Down    
*      
14. Just Like
Everyday People
     
*    
15. The Time Is Now  
*    
   
16. Peace      
*B    
17. Supertalents
*C      
   
Letters  indicate  which  modification  in  the  speaking  activity  applies  

57  
 
Section 4.B: Post-listening – Reading Activities
In Parts II and III of the book there are short readings that accompany each song on the Sing Out Loud
CDs. These readings are based on the history of the song, its composer or singer, a theme related to
ideas in the song, its musical genre, or a combination of these topics. The level of the readings varies;
most of those that accompany the Sing Out Loud: Traditional Songs units are suitable for students at
Level 2 (see page 3); others (especially those included in the Sing Out Loud: American Rhythms units)
may be more appropriate for Level 3 and above. If you think the reading text is too difficult for your
students, you might either find a different reading passage related to the theme or simplify the reading
task.

As with listening activities, when introducing a reading text to students it is very beneficial to use a pre-
reading activity. Pre-reading, like pre-listening, can help students practice their prediction strategies,
introduce them to particular vocabulary and cultural references, and give them a specific reading task.
Some of the pre-listening activities in the book may be adapted to pre-reading activities, or you may wish
to develop your own.

Following are five activities that students can do while reading the texts. You may try a variety of these
activities, however, the specific texts related to each song on the Sing Out Loud CDs found in Parts II
and III may also be used for general comprehension-based activities. An index of model units is provided
at the end of this activity section.

Post-listening – Reading Activities:

Post-listening – Reading 1: A Range of Questions .................................................................... 58

Post-listening – Reading 2: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details................................................. 59
Post-listening – Reading 3: Jigsaw Reading.............................................................................. 60
Post-listening – Reading 4: Our Land, Your Land...................................................................... 62
Post-listening – Reading 5: Reading Groups ............................................................................. 64

Post-listening - Reading 1: A Range of Questions

Purpose: To read for factual details, and to combine, infer, evaluate, and reflect on information in a
reading text

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 40 minutes, depending on the length of the reading text

Note to the Teacher: Many teachers give students comprehension questions to answer while they are
reading a text. However, it is important to give students a range of question types so that they practice
different critical thinking skills. Examples of question types:
• focusing on one piece of factual information: How old is Tom?
• combining several facts from the reading to get one answer: Who is older, Tom or Bob?
• inferring the answer based on the text: Tom was caught stealing. Based on the rest of the story,
what punishment do you think he received?
• evaluating parts of the texts: Do you think the description of the brothers was good?
• relating the text to one’s own personal experience or opinion: What would your mother do if she
caught you stealing?

58  
 
Preparation and Materials: Prepare a number of questions based on the reading text. Include at least
one question of each type above. Make a copy of the reading text for each student.
Instructions:
1. After doing a pre-reading activity, write the questions on the board. Ask students to read through
the questions. They do not need to copy them.
2. Set a time limit for the students to read the text and answer the questions. Students can work
individually on the questions.
3. When they are finished, divide students into pairs or groups of three to check their answers
together. Give them sufficient time to compare their answers.
4. Go through the answers with the students. When they give incorrect answers, help them to
understand why they are incorrect.

Modifications:
A. + groups Divide students into groups. Ask students to read the text, and create
+ difficulty their own comprehension questions based on the text. Have groups
+ questions exchange and answer each other’s questions. After all groups have
+ time answered one other group’s questions, the class can discuss a few of
the questions.

B. - difficulty Create true/false or multiple-choice questions.

- time

C. - difficulty Provide hints along with the questions that indicate where in the text
students should look for the answers. Example:
look at paragraph 2

D. + difficulty Put the questions on a worksheet. Give students the worksheet and
+ materials have them write short answers to the questions.
+ writing

Post-listening – Reading 2: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details

Purpose: To write and answer questions that focus on main ideas and details

Level: 3 and above

Time: 30 – 40 minutes in class (part of this activity can also be given for homework)

Note to the Teacher: To read for the “gist” means to search for the main ideas. There may be one
overall main idea plus separate paragraphs may have their own main idea. To read for detail is to find
specific information within a text. Details give support to the main ideas. A main-idea question asks about
the general ideas of a text or paragraph. Example: Why have many wild animals become extinct?
A detail question is much more specific and often can be answered with a name, a date, or a fact.
Example: How many buffalo were killed by the frontiersmen who settled the Great Plains?

Preparation and Materials: Prepare copies of a short reading text related to the theme of the song.

Instructions:
1. Explain to students the difference between a main-idea question and a detail question.
2. As a homework assignment, tell students to write questions based on the reading text. Two or
three of the questions should be about main ideas and four or five questions about specific
details.

59  
 
 3. In class, have students exchange their questions with classmates. Tell them to answer the
questions they received, and encourage them to discuss their answers with whoever wrote the
questions.

Modifications:
A. - time Assign the above activity, but in class, choose a number of students to
write one main-idea question and one detail question on the board.
Then ask the rest of the students to think of answers for the questions
while they are reading.

B. + groups Divide the class into small groups of four. Ask each group to write eight
+ time questions for the text: three main-idea questions and five detail
questions. Have each group exchange their questions with another
group. Give them time to answer the new questions. Pass the papers
back to the original groups to correct the answers.

C. - difficulty Provide one question of each type as a model for students.

+ scaffolding

D. + extension Prepare a handout with three to five main-idea questions, three to five
+ groups details questions, and three to five questions of some other type. Divide
+ materials students into groups, and have students choose two main-idea and two
+ time details questions to ask another group. Have students explain why they
think each question is a detail or a main-idea question.

Post-listening – Reading 3: Jigsaw Reading

Purpose: To summarize information presented in texts, speak and listen in order to present information,
practice note-taking, and collaborate as part of a team

Level: 2 and above Time: 50 – 60 minutes

Note to the Teacher: A jigsaw reading activity begins with the separation of a text into sections or
paragraphs, which are handed out to different groups to read. Each group reads a different section of the
text. (Jigsaw readings are not the same as scrambled readings in which a text is cut up and one group
has all of the pieces to put together.) This activity may be extended over several class sessions. Session
1 (first grouping): 25 – 30 minutes; Session 2 (second grouping): 25 – 30 minutes.

Preparation and Materials:

I. Copies of the Paragraphs. Divide the number of students in the class by the number of paragraphs in
the reading to figure out the number of copies of each paragraph you will need. Example: If you have 28
students in your class and the reading text has four paragraphs (28 ÷ 4 = 7), you will need seven copies
of each paragraph.

Label the copies of each paragraph with corresponding numbers and letters in the following way: Copies
for Paragraph 1 should be labeled 1-A, 1-B, 1-C, 1-D and so on; for Paragraph 2, 2-A, 2-B, 2-C, 2-D, and
so on. Label the other paragraphs in the same way.

In this activity, students are assigned to groups two separate times: the first time, all of the students in
one group will read the same paragraph together (for example, all Paragraph 1 or all Paragraph 2).
Students should not be able to see the other paragraphs of the text while they are reading their
paragraph.
60  
 
In the second grouping, students form new groups that contain one student from each of the previous
groups so each group member represents a different paragraph. Thus, each student in the group has a
different paragraph to explain (from the first grouping) to the rest of the group. In the end, everyone
understands the whole reading.

II. Note-taking Forms. Students will need to make a note-taking form for this activity. Tell students to take
a sheet of paper and divide it into sections by drawing lines to separate the page into the same number of
sections as the number of paragraphs. They should use one section for their notes about their own
paragraph, and one section for each of the other paragraphs that they will learn about in the second
grouping. Example:

Paragraph 1 Paragraph 2

Paragraph 3 Paragraph 4

Instructions:
First Grouping:
1. Divide the class into groups. There should be the same number of groups as there are
paragraphs in the reading. Example: If there are three paragraphs, then there should be three
groups; if there are four paragraphs, then there should be four groups, etc.
2. All of the students in the group receive the same paragraph from the reading. Example: All of the
students in Group 1 are given Paragraph 1.
3. Instruct students to read their paragraph and to write summary notes in the appropriate space on
the note-taking form they made.
4. Tell them to identify and define three to five keywords in their paragraph, so that they will be able
to explain these words. Students can help each other to complete this task.
5. Emphasize to students that they will each be responsible for sharing the information and words
from the paragraph. The group must be sure that each member has adequate notes and can
speak about the ideas in that paragraph.
6. As students move to new groups for the second grouping, the teacher should take the
paragraphs away from them so that they must rely on their notes.

Second Grouping:
1. Ask students to move to their second group by finding the other students who have the same
capital letter printed on their copy. All of the A’s sit together, all of the B’s sit together, and so on.
2. Instruct the students who read Paragraph 1 to begin. They should explain their paragraph and
vocabulary to the rest of their groups. As students are explaining paragraphs, the others in their
group take notes in the space provided on their note-taking form, in the box for Paragraph 1.
3. Next the students who read Paragraph 2 should speak, then the students with Paragraph 3, and
so on.
4. When everyone in the group has finished speaking, each student should have a complete set of
notes that summarizes the reading.
5. Next are several options: You could lead the class in a discussion of the reading and highlight
keywords that aid in understanding it. You could ask students to write a summary of the reading
based on their notes. You could give students a quiz about the reading and see which group took
the best notes.
Modifications:
A. + scaffolding This jigsaw reading activity could be used as a decision-making task.
+ make decisions Tell students that you need to make a choice about something.
61  
 
 Example:
What type of car should you buy for your family?
What is the best way to stay healthy?
Use a series of paragraphs that give information about different items
or options, and ask students to complete the jigsaw task as described
above. Once everyone in the second grouping has completed the set of
notes, ask the groups to make a recommendation and state their
reasons.

B. - difficulty Provide a partially completed outline or summary for each paragraph.

- time This will help students to identify the information they need to
summarize.

C. - difficulty Provide three to five questions to each group in the first grouping. They
+ scaffolding should try to answer these questions for their paragraph. Then in the
+ materials second grouping, have the groups use the answers to those questions
to create their summary.

D. + extension Have all of the students use their complete set of notes to write a full
+ writing summary of the text either in class or as homework.
+ time

Post-listening - Reading 4: Our Land, Your Land

Purpose: To think critically, make connections between the reading and the world, practice comparative
adjectives, and develop an understanding of geography

Level: 3 and above Time: 40 minutes

Note to the Teacher: This activity works well with readings that contain information about places or
geographical features, but may not be appropriate for readings without this type of information. Examples
of reading texts that work well with this activity: see the units for Swing Low, Sweet Chariot and Down in
the Valley.

Preparation and Materials: Prepare maps of the United States and your own country. Gather
information about the geographical features of both countries. Get students to read the text for
comprehension.

62  
 
Instructions:
1. Ask students to circle any references to geography that they can find in the reading, such as
mountains, rivers, or plains. (Students should have already read the text for comprehension.)
2. Draw a basic outline of a map of the United States on the board. Ask students to copy it and to
draw the geographic features from the reading onto the map. You might also tell them about other
features of U.S. geography.
3. Then ask the students to draw a basic outline of their own country and put in the main geographic
features.
4. Review comparative language, such as The U.S. has longer rivers than our country; Our country
has a bigger desert than the U.S.
5. Divide students into small groups and ask them to see how many comparisons they can make
between the two maps. You can ask them to find both similarities and differences.

Modifications:
A. + history Some of the readings in Part II focus on U.S. history. After reading the
text for comprehension, ask the students to circle any references to
historical dates. Put these dates on the board and ask students what
was happening in the U.S. at that time. Then ask them about the history
of their own country. Ask them to explain what was happening in their
country at the same time.

63  
 
Post-listening - Reading 5: Reading Groups

Purpose: To practice reading comprehension skills, conduct research, think critically, and collaborate as
part of a team

Level: 3 and above

Time: 45 – 50 minutes in class (groups may need much more time outside of class)

Note to the Teacher: This activity can be used throughout the course. Choose a different group of
students to carry out this activity for different songs throughout the year. Allow the assigned group one
week to prepare before the presentation.

Preparation and Materials: Assign this project as a group activity. Students may need materials such as
colored pens/markers, glue, and paper for making posters.

Instructions:
1. Divide the class into small groups of five or six.
2. When you want to use a reading in class, select one group to prepare for that reading. On the day
that you use the reading, it is their task to be the “reading teachers”. A different group will be
assigned for the next reading.
3. Assign a different role/task to each member of the group. Suggested roles are as follows:

The Leader introduces the activity and moderates the presentation. The Leader monitors the
time and makes sure that class members participate.
The Historian/Geographer presents background information about the reading. Depending
on the reading, this could be historical, cultural or geographical information.
The Wordmasters look up keywords and teach the new vocabulary to the class. They write
sentences or draw pictures to illustrate the meanings of the words.
The Questioners create reading comprehension questions based on the reading. After the
Wordmasters and the Historian/Geographer present their information to the class, then the
Questioners write the comprehension questions on the board. The class reads the text and
tries to answer the questions. After that the Questioners call on students to answer.
The Discusser creates discussion questions related to the reading. These questions should
elicit students’ opinions about the reading and the topic. The Discusser and the Leader
organize the rest of the class into small groups to complete the discussion.

Modifications:
A. - difficulty To make this an in-class activity only, divide the class into groups. Give
- time each group one paragraph from the reading, and within each group
assign roles according to Step 3 above. For an in-class activity, have
the Historian/Geographer present a summary of the paragraph rather
than background information, and the Questioners and the Discussers
come up with one or two questions. Once groups are ready, go through
the text one paragraph at a time.

B. - difficulty Divide students into five groups, one group for each of the five roles
described above. Assign each group one of the roles. Have the groups
work together to complete the tasks described above. In the following
class, divide students into new groups that contain one person for each
role. Have each group go through and discuss the reading with each
person leading the discussion about their assigned topic/role.

64  
 
 Index of Post-listening Reading Activities for Traditional Song Units

Reading Activities

5. Reading Groups
3. Jigsaw Reading

4. Our Land, Your

Ideas/Specific
1. A Range of
Questions

2. Main

Details
Traditional

Land
Song Units
1. Working on the
Railroad     *      
2. She’ll Be Coming
‘Round the Mountain
  *        
3. Michael, Row
Your Boat Ashore *          
4. On Top of Old
Smokey *          
5. Home on the
Range         *  
6. Yankee Doodle
        *  
7. Red River Valley
        *  
8. Swing Low, Sweet
Chariot       *A    
9. Clementine
  *        
10. Billy Boy
*          
11. Oh! Susanna
    *      
12. Down in the
Valley       *A    
13. He’s Got the
Whole World in His     *      
Hands
Letters  indicate  which  modification  in  the  reading  activity  applies  

65  
 
 Index of Post-listening Reading Activities for American Rhythm Units

Reading Activities

4. Our Land, Your Land

2. Main Ideas/Specific

5. Reading Groups
3. Jigsaw Reading
1. A Range of
Questions
American

Details
Rhythms
Song Units
1. Lessons in Life
  *        
2. Champion
*D          
3. Stronger &
Stronger     *A      
4. You Made Me
Laugh         *  
5. A Lot of Days Are
Gone       *    
6. Good Morning,
New Orleans         *  
7. Simple Down
  *        
8. El Paso
*D          
9. Not Afraid
  *        
10. Can’t Stop
        *A  
11. Into the Garden
  *        
12. Hey, Little
Minivan     *A      
13. Further Down
  *        
14. Just Like
Everyday People   *        
15. The Time Is Now
        *A  
16. Peace
*D          
17. Supertalents
*D          
Letters  indicate  which  modification  in  the  reading  activity  applies

66  
 
Section 4.C: Post-listening – Writing Activities  

Writing in a foreign language offers unique challenges for many students, but it also offers an opportunity
to focus explicitly on language forms along with the functions that those forms serve in real
communicative situations. The writing activities included in this book can be completed by students
individually or working together to produce a short text. Each of the activities below asks students to focus
on a particular communicative task. While some activities are more creative, others require students to
conduct background research, form critical opinions, summarize and present information, or use
language to communicate with individuals outside the classroom.

As with listening, when introducing a reading text to students, it is very beneficial to use a pre-writing
activity. Pre-writing can help students plan before they carry out the writing task, introduce them to
particular vocabulary and cultural references, and give them a specific writing task. You may be able to
adapt some of the pre-listening activities in Section 1 as pre-writing activities, or you may wish to develop
your own.

Following are six activities that students can do to practice their writing skills in a communicative task. An
index of model units is provided at the end of this section.

Post-listening – Writing Activities:

Post-listening – Writing 1: Songwriter Histories ......................................................................... 67

Post-listening – Writing 2: I Think This Song Rocks! ................................................................. 68
Post-listening – Writing 3: Paragraph Posters ........................................................................... 69
Post-listening – Writing 4: Story Extensions .............................................................................. 70
Post-listening – Writing 5: Guest Musicians / Speakers............................................................. 71

........................................................................................................................................................................

Post-listening – Writing 1: Songwriter Histories

Purpose: To write short narratives in the past tense

Level: 2 and above Time: 40 – 50 minute

Note to the Teacher: This activity may be extended over several class sessions. Session 1 (Steps 1 –
5): 25 – 30 minutes; Session 2 (Step 6): 15 – 20 minutes.

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions:
1. Divide students into pairs or small groups of three. Ask them to brainstorm some ideas about the
mood of the song: happy, sad, joyful, and so on. Ask them to explain why they feel that way.
2. Then ask the students to brainstorm about the songwriter: age, personality, background, and so
on.
3. Finally, ask the students why they think the songwriter wrote this song. Example prompts:
He was sad about…
She was angry about…
He was happy that….
4. Tell the students that they are going to write a short story about the life of the songwriter before
he/she wrote the song.
5. Give the students time in their groups to discuss their ideas and write their stories. You may wish
to review the past tense with them and chronological connectors such as:
first next after that finally

67  
 
 6. When the students are finished, post the stories on the walls of the classroom for other students
to read, or have the groups read their stories aloud. You can give a round of applause or a small
reward for the funniest or most clever stories.

Modifications:
A. + prediction Alternatively, students can write about the songwriter and what
happened after the song was written.

B. + prediction Pretend that the song is brand new. Ask students to write a story about
+ future tense what will happen as a result of the song, both in the world and to the
+ conditionals songwriter.

C. - difficulty Provide a comic strip or picture that could represent the sequence of
+ scaffolding events that led up to the writing of the song. Ask students to write a
+ materials story or the dialogue to accompany the comic strip.

D. + difficulty As homework, assign students to research the songwriter outside of

+ research class. Have them bring in this information to use in writing their stories
+ time in groups.

Post-listening - Writing 2: I Think This Song Rocks!

Purpose: To critically evaluate a piece of music, and write a short, persuasive review of the song.

Level: 3 and above Time: 40 – 50 minutes

Note to the Teacher: This activity may be extended over several class sessions. Session 1 (Steps 1 –
5): 30 – 35 minutes; Session 2 (Step 6): 10 – 15 minutes.

Preparation and Materials: Gather information about song reviews. Prepare a list of topics related to
the theme of the song, its musical genre, or types of instruments used in the musical arrangement.
Examples:
• Types of instruments
• Adjectives about music
• Nouns about music

Instructions:
1. Divide students into groups of three. Each group needs one recorder, who takes notes while the
other students speak. Tell the students that you are going to shout out a topic, and they need to
make a list of all of the words they know on that topic in two minutes.
2. When the students are ready, shout Types of instruments. The recorders in the groups should
write a list of instruments while the other students make suggestions.
3. After two minutes, shout STOP and ask the groups to count how many words they have.
Continue with a second race, this time shouting “Adjectives about music” and a third race,
“Nouns about music.”
4. You can reward the team with the most words after each race or the total words after all of the
races.
5. When the races are finished, ask each team to write five to ten of their words on the board.
Check that the students know the meanings of these words.

68  
 
 6. Put the word “Review” on the board and tell the students what a song review is. Explain that a
review normally follows the following pattern:
• (Name of Singer’s) new song (Title) is (strong opinion).
• Four to six sentences to justify the writer’s opinion about the song; details about the song
characteristics, such as the lyrics, beat, rhythm, melody, instruments, vocals, and so on.
• Concluding remark or prediction.

7. In their groups ask students to listen to the song again and then write a review (see example
below). Groups can share their reviews with other groups, or post reviews on a class bulletin
board.

Example of a song review: Jippney Sears’ new song “Thistle” is absolutely delightful. The funky and
hypnotic mandolin introduction is fabulous, while the thumping bass beat makes you want to jump up and
dance. The lyrics, written by Bob Jones, are both clever and cynical. Even with her typically thin vocals,
Sears delivers them with style. “Thistle” may well make people reevaluate Ms. Sears and is sure to top
the charts all year.

Modifications:
A. - difficulty Provide a partially completed review, along with a bank of descriptive
+ scaffolding words that can be used in the review. Ask students to complete the
+ materials review by choosing descriptors based on their opinions of the song.

B. - difficulty Pre-teach phrases that help students express their opinions about the
+ scaffolding song. Examples:
+ time I like this song because…
This song sounds…

Post-listening – Writing 3: Paragraph Posters

Purpose: To write cohesive paragraphs, and represent ideas visually

Level: 2 and above Time: 100 – 130 minutes (students may do some preparation outside of class)

Note to the Teacher: This activity may be extended over several class sessions:
Session 1 - learning about paragraph type (Step 1): 30 minutes
Session 2 – writing (Step 2): 30 – 40 minutes
Session 3 - poster preparation (Steps 3 – 4): 20 – 30 minutes
Session 4 - poster display (Step 5): 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a topic related to the song. (optional) Gather crayons or markers,
old magazines, glue, and poster paper. Prepare a model paragraph for the students to study.

Instructions:
1. Tell the students what kind of paragraph you wish them to write: descriptive, persuasive,
classifying, and so on. Present the features of this paragraph type by analyzing model
paragraphs, working on topic sentences, and looking at the language typical of that paragraph
type.

69  
 
 2. Describe a particular topic related to the song. Ask students to write the type of paragraph for that
topic that you have been discussing. Example: students could write a descriptive paragraph
about their hometowns or a classification paragraph about types of pollution.
3. When finished, students create posters using pictures from magazines or their own drawings.
They can glue their paragraph onto the poster or write it directly onto the poster.
4. Instruct students to write their names only on the back of the posters.
5. Ask students to put their posters on a classroom wall. Give students a reading task, such as
guessing the poster’s author or choosing the best paragraph poster. Criteria for recognizing
outstanding paragraphs can be determined by the teacher. Example: most creative, best written,
best use of vocabulary, etc. Tell the students to walk around the room, read the paragraphs, and
complete the task.

Modifications:
A. + groups Have students write the paragraph and make the poster in groups.
When the poster is displayed, tell half of the members of the group to
stand by the poster and explain its content to their classmates while the
other members of the group move around the classroom and look at
the other groups’ posters. They can then switch roles.

B. - space Have students write out their paragraphs on paper instead of posters.
- time Divide students into small groups, and have each student read his/her
paragraph to the group.

C. - difficulty As a whole class generate ideas for the content for the paragraph.
+ scaffolding Then have students write paragraphs individually or in small groups.

(optional)
+ groups

Post-listening – Writing 4: Story Extensions

Purpose: To write creative narratives

Level: 2 and above Time: 45 – 55 minutes

Note to the Teacher: This activity may be extended over several class sessions:
Session 1 (Steps 1 – 6): 25 – 30 minutes
Session 2 (Steps 7 – 8): 20 – 25 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a handout with the lyrics of the song or write them on the board.

Instructions:
1. Divide the class into three groups: A, B, and C.
2. Make sure students understand the meaning of the lyrics.
3. Decide, with input from the students, who the main characters in the song are and give them
names, if they do not have any in the song.
4. Individually or in pairs, tell students in Group A to write a narrative paragraph about something
that could have happened to the characters before the events described in the song.
5. Individually or in pairs, tell students in Group B to write a narrative paragraph about what did
happen to the characters according to the song.
6. Individually or in pairs, tell students in Group C to write a narrative paragraph about what could
happen to the characters after the events in the song.

70  
 
 7. Assemble new groups with one student from Group A, one from Group B, and one from Group C.
Have them read their stories to each other in sequence. Some of the story combinations may be
humorous, while others may seem nonsensical.
8. Ask them to make changes so that they have one coherent story. Then invite one or two groups
to share their combined stories with the class.

Modifications:
A. - groups Instead of putting students from different groups together, students in
- time each group can write stories individually and then share their stories
with their group members. They can then select the group’s best story
and have its author read it to the rest of the class.

B. + competition Divide students of three. Have every group write only about what will
- difficulty happen after the song. Tell the students to post their paragraphs on the
wall so that everyone can vote on which paragraph has the best
ending.

C. + songwriter If the song does not have a clear main character, have students write
the narrative about the songwriter or singer of the song.

Post-listening – Writing 5: Guest Musicians / Speakers

Purpose: To generate interest in music and the arts, host a guest in the classroom, and write invitations
and thank-you letters

Level: 3 and above

Time: 120 – 170 minutes (for the complete activity; much less if only parts of the activity are completed)

Note to the Teacher: The complete activity will extend over a period of time and should be divided
between several class sessions:
Session 1 - writing the invitation (Steps 1 – 3): 30 – 40 minutes
Session 2 - preparing for the guest speaker (Steps 5 – 7): 30 – 50 minutes
Session 3 - guest speaker (Step 8): 30 – 40 minutes
Session 4 - writing thank-you letters (Step 9): 30 – 40 minutes

Preparation and Materials: If possible, identify a musical guest from your community who might agree
to come and speak to the class in English. You should speak to potential guests before initiating this
project. Prepare sample invitations and thank-you letters.

Instructions:
1. Ask the students to brainstorm a list of musical guests that they would like to invite to speak to the
class. These musicians should be real people in the community or country who might possibly
come. You may wish to add to the list one or two people who you know will definitely come.
2. Divide students into groups of four, and tell them to select one person from the list.
3. First, they need to send the person an invitation. Teach the correct format for writing letters of
invitation. (See notes and examples below.) Show the students some examples and discuss
salutations, content, and complimentary closings. Each group should write a letter of invitation to
their chosen person. Help the students to find the addresses and mail the letters.
4. Wait for any responses!
5. If a group gets a positive response, instruct the class on how to introduce a guest speaker. (See
notes below.) Discuss the parts of an introduction including the opening, providing biographical
information about the speaker, the welcome, and the time limit.

71  
 
 6. Divide students into pairs and tell them to interview each other briefly. Then get them to practice
introducing one another to the whole class. Decide which student will introduce the guest
speaker.
7. Divide students into small groups. Tell them to brainstorm questions they would like to ask the
guest. Each group should make a list of around five questions. They may practice asking each
other these questions.
8. Invite the guest to come to class and have the class ask their questions after the presentation.
9. During the next class, teach the correct format for writing thank-you letters. (See notes and
examples below.) Show the students some examples and discuss salutations, content, and
complimentary closings. Assign each group write a thank-you letter to the speaker and deliver
these letters.

Modifications:
A. - time Have the students complete Steps 1 – 3 (writing the invitation), but do
- difficulty not send the invitations. Choose someone they will pretend to invite.
Ask students to research or brainstorm information about that person to
use in their invitations. All students or groups can write invitations to the
same person, or choose different people.

B. + creativity If you can find the mailing addresses of internationally famous

musicians, then you can ask students to invite these people to come.
Although it is highly unlikely that a famous musician will accept the
invitation, their publicist might send a photo or a letter thanking the
students for the invitation.

C. + role-play If you are unable to have a musician come to class, you could complete
the activity as a role-play. The teacher or another student could pretend
to be the musician.

D. + extension Gather information about different ways to send invitations (for

+ time example, by email, letter, postcard, poster). Discuss with the students
when each type of invitation might be appropriate. Divide students into
groups, and have each group write/create a different type of invitation.

Notes for the Teacher

This section includes some general information about the form and content of invitations and thank-you
letters, in addition to information about hosting a guest speaker in the classroom. While brief examples
are included below, additional examples can be found online.

Invitation letters
Invitation letters consist of three parts: a greeting or salutation, the body of the message in which you
explain the invitation and give the details of the event, and a closing.

Salutations:
Dear Mr./Ms./Mrs./Dr./ or an honorific title depending on the person’s position or occupation

Body of an Invitation:
We would like to invite you to the (name of school) to speak to (the specific class) about (topic of the
presentation) and / or to perform (name of musical work) for (the specific class).

Our school is located at (address) and a student will meet you at the entrance on the day of your
presentation.

If you are able to accept our request, please reply by sending a confirmation to (person) at the address
above or by telephoning (person) at (phone number).
72  
 
Closing:
Thank you very much for considering our invitation.
(Signature)

Sample invitation letter:

Jackson Heights High School

123 Jackson Road
Trent, VA 22200

November 12, 2xxx

Mr. George Peters

567 Jones Road
Trent, VA 22200

Dear Mr. Peters,

We would like to invite you to the Jackson Heights High School to speak to Grade 9
English class about your musical career. If possible, it would be wonderful if you could
also perform one of your songs for us.

Our school is located at 123 Jackson Road in Trent. A student will meet you at the
entrance on the day of your presentation.

If you are able to accept our request, please reply by sending a confirmation to Ted
Jacobs at the address above or by telephoning our teacher Ms. Brown at 799-2345.

Thank you very much for considering our invitation.

Yours sincerely,

Ted Jacobs
Barry Bailey
Joe Smith

73  
 
Introducing a Speaker

When introducing a speaker, it is customary to tell the audience about the person’s current work and
provide them with any background information that the audience would find interesting or the speaker
would like them to know about.

In preparation, the person who introduces a speaker should contact him or her in advance of the
appearance to obtain that information.

Another thing to keep in mind is that a good introduction is usually brief; thirty seconds to one minute is
considered an appropriate amount of time.

Commonly used phrases for introducing someone:

It is my pleasure to introduce (name of speaker).

I am delighted to introduce (name of speaker).
I am honored to introduce (name of speaker).

(Brief details about the speaker).

Please join me in welcoming (name of speaker). [applause]

Please help me to welcome (name of speaker). [applause]

Thank-you Letters

Thank-you letters should also include a salutation and a closing. The body of the letter should be
personalized to the guest speaker and thank them for coming to the class.

Salutations:
Dear Mr./Ms./Mrs./Dr./ or an honorific title depending on the person’s position or occupation,

Body of a thank-you letter:

Thank you very much for your fine performance for/excellent presentation to (the specific group) at our
school on (date of performance or presentation).
(Some details about the performance or presentation).
We appreciate your willingness to come to our school and hope that you will be our guest again.

Complimentary closings:
Sincerely, Yours sincerely, Very truly yours,
(Signature)

74  
 
Sample thank-you letter:

December 3, 2xxx

Dear Mr. Peters,

Thank you very much for your fine performance and your excellent
presentation to our Grade 9 English class at Jackson Heights High School on
December 1st.

We loved hearing you sing and listening to your stories. We especially liked the
story about when you were young and had to walk to school with your brother.

We appreciate your willingness to come to our school and hope that you will be
our guest again.

Thank you again. It was a great day for us!

Yours sincerely,

Ted Jacobs
Barry Bailey
Joe Smith

75  
 
 Index of Post-listening Writing Activities for Traditional Song Units

Writing Activities

Musicians/Speakers
2. I Think This Song

4. Story Extensions
1. Songwriter

3. Paragraph
Histories

5. Guest
Posters
Rocks!
Traditional
Song Units
1. Working on the
Railroad     *      
2. She’ll Be Coming
‘Round the Mountain   *        
3. Michael, Row
Your Boat Ashore     *      
4. On Top of Old
Smokey *          
5. Home on the
Range       *    
6. Yankee Doodle
        *  
7. Red River Valley
      *    
8. Swing Low, Sweet
Chariot         *A  
9. Clementine
*A          
10. Billy Boy
      *    
11. Oh! Susanna
  *        
12. Down in the
Valley *          
13. He’s Got the
Whole World in His     *      
Hands
Letters  indicate  which  modification  in  the  writing  activity  applies  
 

76  
 
 Index of Post-listening Writing Activities for American Rhythm Units

Writing Activities

1. Songwriter Histories

3. Paragraph Posters

Musicians/Speakers
2. I Think This Song

4. Story Extensions
American

5. Guest
Rocks!
Rhythms
Song Units
1. Lessons in Life
    *C      
2. Champion
*          
3. Stronger &
Stronger *A          
4. You Made Me
Laugh *          
5. A Lot of Days Are
Gone   *        
6. Good Morning,
New Orleans *C          
7. Simple Down
      *B    
8. El Paso
*C          
9. Not Afraid
      *    
10. Can’t Stop
        *A  
11. Into the Garden
    *      
12. Hey, Little
Minivan       *    
13. Further Down
  *        
14. Just Like
Everyday People       *    
15. The Time Is Now
        *  
16. Peace
    *A      
17. Supertalents
    *      
Letters  indicate  which  modification  in  the  writing  activity  applies  

77  
 
Section 5: Extended Classroom Approaches

If your students find it fun, motivating, and rewarding to use songs in their English classroom, you may
want to involve them more comprehensively in planning and carrying out instruction using songs. The
activities in this section are extension activities that invite students to take a leading role in researching,
introducing, and presenting songs to their classmates.

These activities work best after your students have become familiar with using songs in the classroom.
While many activities require more time for students and teachers in terms of pre-class preparation and in
the classroom, you and your students should find them rewarding and engaging. They can be used
throughout the year, and different groups of students can be asked to help with activities for different
songs, giving each student a change to participate.

Extended Classroom Approaches:

Extended Classroom Approaches 1: Using a Skit as a Hook .................................................... 78

Extended Classroom Approaches 2: Song Groups ................................................................... 80
Extended Classroom Approaches 3: American Pop Star .......................................................... 81

Extended Classroom Approaches 1: Using a Skit as a Hook

Purpose: To generate interest in the song, and practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: 2 and above

Time: Preparation time with individual students – 45 minutes to one hour

Time allowed for performing the skit in class – five to ten minutes

Preparation and Materials: The main preparation for this activity requires that the teacher meet with the
students who will perform the skit before class to prepare and rehearse the dialogue. The teacher should
prepare a list of keywords from the song to include in the dialogue.

Instructions:
1. Choose two students to be the actors in the skit. Before class, meet with the students and
introduce the song to them. Let them listen to the song, and then brainstorm ideas for a skit that
focuses on some aspect of the song. Examples:
General theme of the song
Genre or style of music
History of the song or song writer/performer
Specific ideas that are represented in the lyrics

2. After an idea has been selected, draft a dialogue with the students who will be performing. The
dialogue should have two speaking parts and contain between 14 and 20 lines (an equal number
of lines for both actors). The skit should contain keywords taken from the song and even some of
the lines from the song.
3. Depending on the level and age of the students, give them a day or two to rehearse the skit as a
homework assignment.
4. Before listening to the song, have the students perform the skit at the start of class.

78  
 
 5. Introduce the song by making comments about the skit in relation to the theme of the song.
Possible ways to make connections between the skit and the song:
• ask students to make predictions about the song and the themes that will be in it based
on the skit
• divide students into small groups and ask them to summarize the skit, focusing on
questions like who, what, where, why, and when
• give students one or two lines from the song that relate to the skit and ask them to
interpret what those lines might mean

Modifications:
A. + difficulty The number of actors and the length of the dialogue in the skit may
increase depending on the students’ proficiency level.

B. - difficulty Lower-level students can use mime or limited vocabulary to introduce

the concepts from the song rather than a skit with scripted lines.

C. + groups This activity can be an activity for the whole class. Divide the students
+ vocabulary into groups of four or five. Tell them the theme of the song and give
them five or six vocabulary words from the song to include in their skits.
Tell them that they need to write a very short skit (three or four minutes
long) on this theme involving all of the students in their group. Perform
the skits. You may have the class vote on the best skit. Then follow
Step 6 above.

D. - difficulty Instead of preparing a spoken skit, the students can work in small
+ writing groups to create a comic strip or short illustrated story. Give students a
series of pictures related to a theme in the song, and tell them to write
(optional) the dialogue to go along with the comic. Or you can have students both
+ art draw the comic and write the dialogue. After they complete the comic,
have students read the comic aloud to the class. Then follow Step 6
above. This activity can be completed by two students as in the basic
activity, or in conjunction with Modification C.

E. + difficulty Provide the dialogue/skit for students. Leave blanks in the dialogue that
- time can be filled with vocabulary items from the song. Have students select
words to complete the dialogue, practice, and then perform the skit
during class as described above.

79  
 
  
Extended Classroom Approaches 2: Song Groups

Purpose: To conduct research, present information, and collaborate as part of a team

Level: 3 and above

Time: Explain the task — 20 – 30 minutes

In-class presentation — 20 – 30 minutes (plus preparation time outside of class)

Note to the Teacher: This activity can be used throughout the course. Choose a different group of
students to carry out this activity for different songs throughout the year. Allow the assigned group one
week to prepare before the presentation. You may want to give the group the reading text provided in
Part II of this book to help them research the song.

Preparation and Materials: Assign this project as a group activity. Students may need some materials,
such as colored pens/markers, glue, and paper for making posters.

Instructions:
1. Select a group of five or six students to prepare a presentation to make before the whole class. A
different group can do the next song.
2. Assign a different role/task to each member of the group. Suggested roles are as follows:

The Leader introduces and moderates the presentation, which might involve writing on the
board or giving directions.
The Teacher designs a listening task for the students to do when listening to the song. This
task could be answering particular questions, writing down certain words, or performing
certain actions.
The Verse Selector chooses a favorite or interesting line(s) from the song, explains the
message of the line(s), gives examples to illustrate the meaning, and discusses why he/she
chose these lines. This student should also help to define new vocabulary in the song.
The Culture Explorer finds out about the song’s role in past and present American culture
and tells the class what they have learned.
The Performers sing the song for the class in their choice of singing style. They can then
explain why they chose that particular style. (This could include the whole group, or just one
or two students.)

3. On the day you plan to teach the song in class, allow the group to lead the presentation by
introducing the song, explaining the verses and culture, giving the listening task, and listening to
the song.

80  
 
Extended Classroom Approaches 3: American Pop Star

Purpose: To perform and listen to a variety of songs, and build confidence in language skills

Level: All Time: 40 minutes or more, depending on how many students volunteer

Note to the Teacher: In this activity students perform a number of different songs in class in a
competition format. This activity works best after the class has learned several songs. If many students
want to participate, you can hold several American Pop Star competitions throughout the school year.
This activity may be extended over several class sessions. Session 1 (Steps 1 – 2): 10 – 15 minutes;
Session 2 (Steps 3 – 7): 30 – 40 minutes.

Preparation and Materials: If possible, obtain a microphone or device for amplifying the voices of the
singers.

Instructions:
1. After students have learned to sing a number of different songs in class, tell them that the class is
going to have an American Pop Star competition. Ask students to volunteer to sing the songs in
front of their classmates. Each volunteer should choose their favorite song to perform. It could be
one of the songs they learned in class or another song in English that they know. You will need
between five and ten volunteers to take part in the competition.

2. Explain that there will be a preliminary competition; the students will sing their favorite songs and
their classmates will vote for the two best renditions. Later, the winners of this contest will
compete in a final singing competition.

3. On the day of the performances, students in the audience vote by secret ballot for their favorite
singers. Set the criteria ahead of time. They could be quality of performance, singing the correct
lyrics, and originality. Students can be involved with selecting the criteria.

4. Hold the competition. The two highest vote-getters win the semi-final round of the contest and
move on to the final to be held later in the academic year.

5. Later in the semester, repeat this procedure with a new group of songs.

6. Finally, the winners of the preliminary rounds compete in a final competition. At end of the final
round, students vote by secret ballot for the three best renditions.

7. Awards may be given to the three top finalists.

 

81  
 
PART III: MATERIALS FOR SING OUT LOUD: AMERICAN RHYTHMS
In this part of the book, you will find all of the class materials for the songs on the Sing Out
Loud: American Rhythms CD. These materials are collected into song units for each of the
selections on the CD. On the first page of each song unit, you will find an activity menu with
three suggested activities for each of the four types of activities:
1. Pre-listening
2. Listening
3. Singing
4. Post-listening

The second page of each song unit contains the lyrics of the song, which can be used as a
handout or simply as a reference for you. The rest of the unit includes descriptions of suggested
activities with the estimated language proficiency level and amount of time required. Materials
needed for the activity may be a list of words or questions, handouts that you can photocopy or
write on the board, reading texts, pictures, and answer keys. For the complete instructions on
how to use each activity, you will need to turn back to a specific page in Part I.

Select activities from each menu section that are appropriate for your students, just as you
would select food items from a restaurant menu. Choose activities from the menu that app0eal
to your students’ tastes. Try at least one pre-listening, one listening, one singing, and one post-
listening activity for each song. However, depending on your students’ needs, you may wish to
include additional activities including the three Extended Classroom Approaches found in
Section 5 of. Spice things up by adding your own ideas and activities. The ultimate goal is to
tailor the lessons to your students' particular tastes.

82
 
 Song 1: Lessons in Life

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

Four Corners
Unscramble the Sentences
Picture Dictation

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Listening Gap-Fill
Find the Mistakes

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

Show Me the Word
Disappearing Song

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: Silly Story

Reading: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details
Writing: Paragraph Posters

83
 
Lessons in Life: Lyrics
by Bridgette Bryant
(2:26)

1 Having a friend is like planting a flower

Show love and kindness it one day will bloom
Let's be aware as we walk on this planet
Even the tiniest creature needs room.
5 Lessons in life aren't always so simple
Nothing you're given will ever come free
Even the smallest of gifts deserves "thank you"
I respect you and you respect me
I think of you and you think of me.

10 Remember everyone here is important

When you're forgotten, it makes you feel sad
Know that you matter and you make a difference
Let no one shame you or make you feel bad.
Lessons in life aren't always so simple
15 Nothing you're given will ever come free (nothing ever gonna come to you freely)
Even the smallest of gifts deserves "thank you"
I respect you and you respect me
I think about you and you think about me. (I think of you and you think of me)

19 Lessons in life aren't always so simple

Nothing you're given will ever come free
Even the smallest of gifts deserves "thank you"
I respect you and you respect me
I think of you and you think about me. (I think of you and you think of me)

84
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Four Corners

Purpose: To generate interest in the song, express opinions, and make choices about
controversial ideas/statements

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Label four corners or areas of the classroom with posters or signs:
Strongly Agree Agree Disagree Strongly Disagree

Instructions: See page 9. Write the following controversial statements on the board (but only
one at a time):
1. Friends are more important than family members.
2. It is important to remember your friends on special occasions.
3. We should respect others even if they do not respect us.
4. Being thankful depends on how much you have been given.
5. Only life lessons that are hard to learn are worth learning.

Unscramble the Sentences

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary and grammar for the song, and write
phrases and sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 25 – 35 minutes, plus the length of the song (2:26 mins.)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Scrambled Sentences handout (page 86) for
each group of students. (Answer key: page 95.)

Instructions: See page 16, Modification A.

Picture Dictation

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, activate background
knowledge about the topic, and recognize prepositions

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the picture of the woman watering flowers (page 87) on the
board. Cover the picture and lyrics with paper so that students cannot see them.

Instructions: See page 22. After completing the picture dictation, uncover the lines from the
song and ask students to make predictions based on the picture and the lines.

85
 
Lessons in Life: Unscramble the Sentences

Directions: Each sentence below has been scrambled so that the words are mixed up. For each
sentence, put the words in the correct order to form grammatical and sensible sentences. Then,
try to put the lines in the order that they will appear in the song.

1. deserves Even gifts of smallest “thank the you”

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

2. I and me of of think think you you

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

3. always aren’t in Lessons life simple so

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

4. I and me respect respect you you

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

5. come ever free given Nothing will you’re

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

86
 
Lessons in Life: Picture Dictation

Having a friend is like

planting a flower.
Show love and kindness
it one day will bloom.
87
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song

Level: All Time: 10 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the four discussion questions (page 27) on the board, or
create your own.

Instructions: See page 27.

Listening Gap-Fill

Purpose: To listen for details

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the gap-fill handout (page 89) for each student.
(Answer key: page 98.)

Instructions: See page 31.

Find the Mistakes

Purpose: To listen for details and for specific words or phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to play the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Find the Mistakes handout (page 90) for each
group of students. (Answer key: page 95.)

Instructions: See page 34. Play the first part of the song (lines 1 – 13, 0:00 – 1:05 mins.).

88
 
Lessons in Life: Listening Gap-Fill

Directions: First, read through these song lyrics and guess what the missing words might be.
Write your guesses in the blanks. Second, as you listen to the song, correct what you have
written or fill in any missing words.

Having a (1) ____________________ is like planting a (2) ____________________

Show (3) ____________________ and (4) ____________________ it one day will bloom

Let's be aware as we walk on this (5) ____________________

Even the tiniest (6) ____________________ needs room.

(7) ____________________ in life aren't always so simple

Nothing you're (8) ____________________ will ever come free

Even the smallest of (9) ____________________ deserves (10) “____________________”

I (11) ____________________ you and you (12) ____________________ me

I (13) ____________________ of you and you (14) ____________________ of me

Remember (15) ____________________ here is important

When you're forgotten it makes you feel (16) ____________________

Know that you matter and you make a (17) ____________________

Let no one shame you or make you (18) ____________________ bad.

Lessons in life aren't always so simple

Nothing you're (19) ____________________ will ever come free (nothing every gonna come to
you freely.)

Even the smallest of (20) ____________________ deserves (21) “____________________”

I (22) ____________________ you and you (22) ____________________ me

I (23) ____________________ about you and you (24) ____________________ about me (I

think of you and you think of me).

89
 
Lessons in Life: Find the Mistakes

Directions: As you listen to the first minute of the song, read the lyrics below. Find and correct
all of the mistakes in the lyrics.

1 Having a friend is like growing a flower

Show love and kindness it one day should bloom
Let's be aware as we walk on this planet
Even the tiniest creature need room.
5 Lessons in life aren't ever so simple
Nothing you're given will ever come free
Even the biggest of gifts deserves "thank you"
I respected you and you respect me
I think of you and you thought of me

10 Remember everyone here will be important

When you're forgotten it made you feel sad
Know that you matter and you make a difference
Let anyone shame you or make you feel bad.

90
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to sing the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the song lyrics (page 84) on the board or on a large poster.

Instructions: See page 38.

Show Me the Word

Purpose: To make print and sound connections, and learn vocabulary from the song

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare pieces of paper or cards for the students to draw pictures
on. Write the following words on the board in random order:
friend flower kindness planet creature
respect love thank planting think

Instructions: See page 41, Modification A.

Disappearing Song

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation, and recall words and phrases

Level: All Time: 30 – 40 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the song lyrics (page 84) and cut apart the
stanzas.

Instructions: See page 38, Modification B. Divide students into three groups. Assign the
groups the following lines from the song:
Group 1: Stanza 1, lines 1 – 9
Group 2: Stanza 2, lines 10 – 18
Group 3: Stanza 3, lines 19 – end

91
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: Silly Story

Purpose: To tell stories, and practice using new vocabulary in sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Silly Story word cards (page 93) for each group
of students.

Instructions: See page 54.

Reading: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details

Purpose: To write and answer questions that focus on main ideas and details

Level: 3 and above Time: 30 – 40 minutes in class (part of this activity is homework)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text (page 94) for each student. As
homework, assign each student to read the text and write either one main idea question or one
detail question.

Instructions: See page 59.

Writing: Paragraph Posters

Purpose: To write cohesive paragraphs, and represent ideas visually

Level: 2 and above

Time: 100 – 130 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a model descriptive paragraph for students to look at.
(Optional) Gather crayons or markers, old magazines, glue, and poster paper.

Instructions: See page 69, Modification C. Have students write a descriptive paragraph about
the following topic:
Ways to show friends/family that you respect them and think that they are important

92
 
Lessons in Life: Silly Stories

friend love lessons

respect gifts walk

kindness flower think

feel creature give

planet deserve everyone

93
 
 Motivation through Music

When life is difficult, people sometimes use songs and music as tools to bring a little happiness
back into their lives. People may also use songs and music to help remind themselves about the
important things in their lives. We call this type of music ‘motivational music’ because it gives
listeners encouragement1 to act or think in a certain way. This
type of music can leave a lasting impression2 on our lives.
Lessons in Life is a great example of the kind of motivational music
that is popular in America today.

Often these songs encourage the listener to do what is right or

think more positively about life. For example, Lessons in Life
reminds us that the lessons we learn as we go through life aren’t
always simple or easy to learn, such as respecting even the
smallest creature. The purpose of these lines might be to
encourage us to work hard at learning these lessons and being a
good person. However, each person may understand the message of a motivational song in a
different way. We all hear the same song, but we all have different lessons to learn in life and so
we take away something different from the song.

Motivational songs have simple tunes that often use repeated words
and rhythms. This means that anyone can remember and sing the
song. This type of motivational music is not new. In fact, motivational
music has a long history in the United States. For example, during
the American Revolution (1775 – 1783) when the American colonies
fought an important war for independence from British rule, American
soldiers sang motivational songs such as Yankee Doodle. This song
was first sung by the British to make fun of the American soldiers (the
word ‘doodle’ refers to someone who is simple-minded3). However,
the American soldiers soon stole the song, changed some of the
words, and used the song to make fun of the British soldiers instead. What a switch! Yankee
Doodle quickly became a song that motivated the American soldiers. Although it was a difficult
time, this light-hearted4 song helped lift their spirits5 because it
became a symbol of their pride and patriotism.6

Today, it is common for popular music from movies to become national

symbols of hope, motivation, and determination. For example, singer and
actress Judy Garland made the song Over the Rainbow famous in the
1939 movie The Wizard of Oz. In the song, Garland sings about finding a
place in the world where skies are blue, bluebirds fly, and troubles “melt
away,” or disappear. The song was very influential,7 perhaps because it
expressed the country’s longing8 and hope for a better world during war
time.
                                                                                                           
1
encouragement the act of giving hope and support to another person
2
leave a lasting impression to have a strong influence that remains for a long time
3
simple-minded not intelligent, lacking good judgment
4
light-hearted happy, cheerful, not serious
5
lift (someone’s) spirits to make someone feel happier or better; to cheer up someone
6
patriotism love that people feel for their country
7
influential having the power to move or change others
8
longing to want something very much  

94
 
 Lessons in Life: Answer Keys

Unscramble the Sentences: Answer Key

Numbers below correspond to the handout, but the lines are presented in the order of the song.
3. Lessons in life aren’t always so simple.
5. Nothing you’re given will ever come free.
1. Even the smallest of gifts deserves “thank you”.
4. I respect you and you respect me.
2. I think of you and you think of me.

Listening Gap-Fill: Answer Key

Having a (1) __friend____________ is like planting a (2) __ flower_________
Show (3) ___ love________ and (4) ___ kindness__________ it one day will bloom
Let's be aware as we walk on this (5) ___ planet___________
Even the tiniest (6) _____ creature_________ needs room.
(7) ___ Lessons_______ in life aren't always so simple
Nothing you're (8) ____ given________ will ever come free
Even the smallest of (9) ___ gifts_______ deserves (10) “__thank you_____”
I (11) __ respect________ you and you (12) ____ respect_________ me
I (13) ___ think__________ of you and you (14) __ think_________ of me
Remember (15) ___ everyone_________ here is important
When you're forgotten it makes you feel (16) __ sad_____________
Know that you matter and you make a (17) ___ difference________
Let no one shame you or make you (18) ___ feel_________ bad.
Lessons in life aren't always so simple
Nothing you're (19) ___ given__ will ever come free (nothing ever gonna come to you freely)
Even the smallest of (20) ___ gifts_______ deserves (21) “___thank you______”
I (22) ____ respect________ you and you (22) _____ respect_____ me
I (23) _ think_ about you and you (24) _ think_ about me (I think of you and you think of me).

Find the Mistakes: Answer Key

1 Having a friend is like growing planting a flower
Show love and kindness it one day should will bloom
Let's be aware as we walk on this planet
Even the tiniest creature needs room.
5 Lessons in life aren't ever always so simple
Nothing you're given will ever come free
Even the biggest smallest of gifts deserves "thank you"
I respected you and you respect me
I think of you and you thought think of me

10 Remember everyone here will be is important

When you're forgotten it made makes you feel sad
Know that you matter and you make a difference
Let anyone no one shame you or make you feel bad  

95
 
 Song 2: Champion

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

Swat
Stanza Creation
Find Someone Who…

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Song Bingo
Dictation

SINGING

Disappearing Song
Show Me the Word
One Theme – Many Songs

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: Act the Part

Reading: A Range of Questions
Writing: Songwriter Histories

96  
 
Champion: Lyrics
by David Kawika Kahiapo
(4:15)

1 In my life, I’ve tried to be the best that I can be.

In all I’ve done, I’ve tried to do the best that I can do.
But when a mountain comes my way, I’ll climb it to the top.
And with help from up above, I can be a champion.

(Chorus)
5 Stand back, just take a look and see. (look and see)
There’s more out there for you and me. (you and me)
Take hold of your future and believe. (just believe)
You can be anything you want to be.

9 Every time you give your all and try to chase a dream,
Some will doubt, and think it’s just a waste so it seems.
But don’t let them get you down. Just give it all you’ve got.
Set your sight on bigger things. You’ll see you’ve got a lot.

CHORUS

13 In my life, I’ve tried to be the best that I can be.

In all I’ve done, I’ve tried to do the best that I can do.
But when a mountain comes my way, I’ll climb it to the top.
And with help from up above, I can be a champion.

CHORUS (2x)

97  
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Swat

Purpose: To introduce phrases from the song and other motivational phrases, and make print
and sound connections

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a flyswatter or rolled-up newspaper for each team. Write
the following phrases on the board in random order:
take a look give your all chase a dream get you down
give it all you’ve got set your sight stand back take hold
give it your all try, try again follow your dreams stand firm
aim high stand tall strive to do your best

Instructions: See page 12, Modification E.

Stanza Creation

Purpose: To predict the content, introduce vocabulary, and generate interest in the song

Level: All Time: 30 – 40 minutes, plus the length of the song (4:15 mins.)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the comic strip templates (page 99) for each group
of students. Write the following key words from Stanza 1 on the board in random order:
life try best can mountain climb top help champion

Instructions: See page 12, Modification E.

Find Someone Who…

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, activate background
knowledge about the topic, and ask and answer questions

Level: 3 and above Time: 30 minutes, plus the length of the song (4:15 mins.)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the questions (page 100) for each student or
group of students, or write the questions on the board.

Instructions: See page 14.

98  
 
Champion: Stanza Creation

Comic Strip Template: Use the following words to predict what the song Champion will be
about. Draw a three-picture comic that shows this theme.

life try best can mountain climb top help champion

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Comic Strip Template: Use the following words to predict what the song Champion will be
about. Draw a three-picture comic that shows this theme.

life try best can mountain climb top help champion

99  
 
Champion: Find Someone Who…

1. Have you ever won first place in a contest or game?

2. Have you ever climbed a mountain?

3. Have you ever been stopped from achieving a goal because of a problem?

4. Has someone ever doubted that you could do something?

5. Has anyone ever encouraged you to set high goals?

6. Have you ever gotten help from someone else to help you achieve your goals?

7. Have you ever felt that you could have tried harder to achieve a goal?

8. Has anyone ever told you that you can be anything you want to be?

100  
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following three discussion questions on the board, or
create your own:
Does it seem like a happy or a sad song?
Who is the person speaking in the song?
What do the instruments played in the song remind you of?

Instructions: See page 27.

Song Bingo

Purpose: To listen for specific words and phrases. introduce vocabulary from the song, and
make print and sound connections

Level: All Time: 15 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following words from the song on the board in random
order:
mountain climb champion sight see waste stand dream
above life best top give all doubt think future
believe hold more look way bigger tried anything

Instructions: See page 33.

Dictation

Purpose: To listen for details, and write phrases and sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 25 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: (Answer key: see the lyrics on page 97.)

Instructions: See page 29. Stop the song at the end of each stanza (see lyrics on page 97).

101  
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Disappearing Song

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation, and recall words and phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 25 – 30 minutes (to sing the song four times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the lyrics (page 97) on the board.

Instructions: See page 38. Stop after Step 4 (when 50% of the words remain).

Show Me the Word

Purpose: To make print and sound connections, and learn vocabulary from the song

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare pieces of paper or cards for students to write on. Write
the following words on the board in random order:
life best tried mountain champion help future climb
believe chase dream doubt look and see give your all
get you down give it all you’ve got set your sight stand back

Instructions: See page 41, Modification B.

One Theme – Many Songs

Purpose: To write creatively, and practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: 2 and above

Time: 60 – 75 minutes (depending on the number of songs to be performed, this activity may
be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions: See page 40.

102  
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: Act the Part

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation, and use critical thinking skills to resolve a
problem

Level: 3 and above Time: 25 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make enough copies of the role-play cards (page 104) so that
each student has one role. Use the following scenario:
Each of you lives in a different area on a Hawaiian Island. The people in your area
have an environmental problem that you need to solve, and you hope that you can
work with others who live in different areas to come up with a solution.

Instructions: See page 52. Divide students into groups of three. If the number of students in
the class is not divisible by three, make one or two groups of four. Do not create groups of two
or the students may be unable to find a solution to the problem.

Reading: A Range of Questions

Purpose: To read for factual details, and combine, infer, evaluate, and reflect on information in
a reading text

Level: 2 and above Time: 30 – 40 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text and questions (pages 105 - 106)
for each student.

Instructions: See page 58, Modification D.

Writing: Songwriter Histories

Purpose: To write short narratives in the past tense

Level: 2 and above

Time: 40 – 50 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: None.

Instructions: See page 67.

103  
 
Champion: Act the Part

You are from Hulo on the small Hawaiian island of Lanai.

Your town has a great location along a clean and pure river. Hulo
You do not need to worry about water, but you have no seeds
to grow food and your workers have lost their strength so
they cannot prepare the fields. Finally, crossing the river is a
dangerous process, and can only be done with special boats, Keahi
which you cannot build without more wood. How can you
work with your neighbors from Lanai City and Keahi to find a
fair solution to this challenge? Lanai City

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

You are from Lanai City on the small Hawaiian island of

Lanai. Your town is on the opposite side of a big mountain Hulo
range from the nearest water source (a river), keeping you
from traveling to get water. Your people are weak from lack of
water, so you have no strong workers. However, you have
many different types of seeds left over from last year’s Keahi
harvest that you could use to grow food. However, you only
have enough seeds to share with one other city. How can you
work with your neighbors from Hulo and Keahi to find a fair Lanai City
solution to this challenge?

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

You are from Keahi on the small Hawaiian island of Lanai. Hulo
Your town is famous for its strong, dependable workers and
an abundance of building supplies. However, you have been
unable to find seeds that will grow here or a good source of
water. Unfortunately, without seeds or water, you cannot Keahi
grow food to feed your hungry workers. How can you work
with your neighbors from Lanai City and Hulo to find a fair
solution to this challenge? Lanai City

      104
 
 An Aloha State of Mind

In listening to Champion by David “Kawika” Kahiapo,

we are welcomed to the rich and colorful world of
Hawaiian music and culture. The singer and our
Hawaiian guide, Kawika, was born on the island of
Oahu1 in 1960. From an early age, it was clear to
Kawika what he loved: music, food, and family. In
Hawaiian culture, these three things are often found
together. For Kawika and other Hawaiians, helping
others by providing comfort and guidance is a high
priority2, and this shows in his spiritual, family-
oriented music.
Oahu
In Champion, you hear the sound of the ki ho'alu, or
slack-key guitar. The slack-key guitar is a guitar whose strings have been loosened (slacked) to
give it a different sound that is often used in Hawaiian music. Using
the slack-key guitar and his lyrics, Kawika expresses a message of
love for friends and family, and of love for Hawaii. Kawika refers to a
mountain in Champion. This mountain represents a challenge or
difficulty we might face. Although we might feel as if this mountain is
too high to climb, Kawika encourages his listeners to ask for help and
find strength from somewhere outside themselves.

Kawika’s message is conveyed3 not only through the words in the

song, but also through the tone and rhythm of the Hawaiian
instruments. The ki ho'alu and other distinctly Hawaiian musical
instruments (for example, the ukulele, steel guitar, ukeke, and nose
flute) can be played softly, producing a
soothing, mellow tone. This reminds the
listener of the cool and calm waves of the
Pacific Ocean. By using a Hawaiian instrument to convey a Hawaiian
message, Kawika’s commitment to the Hawaiian spirit and the art of
the ki ho'alu is made especially clear.

Why do Hawaiians such as David “Kawika” Kahiapo feel such a strong

ukulele bond with each other and their music? We can answer this question
through an explanation of something called the Spirit of Aloha. The
word aloha is so central to Hawaiian culture that it can be used
both as ‘hello’ and ‘goodbye.’ In the Hawaiian language, aloha
is actually a combination of alo (presence) and ha (breath).
The Hawaiians think of this ‘presence of breath’ as positive
energy harmony between humans and nature. When one lives
with the Spirit of Aloha, he or she feeds upon this positive
energy. This creates good feelings for the person and for his
or her family and friends.

                                                                                                           
1
Oahu the third largest of the Hawaiian Islands and home of Hawaii’s capital city Honolulu
2
priority something that is important and should be taken care of first
3
convey to express or communicate something  
      105
 
Champion: A Range of Questions

Question 1: What is another name for the slack-key guitar? (focusing)

Question 2: When and where was Kawika born? (focusing)

Question 3: In what different ways does Kawika express his message? (combining)

Question 4: What other things do you think that Kawika might do in his daily life to spread his
message of aloha? (inferring)

Question 5: What type of music do you listen to when you are faced with a challenge?
(relating)

Question 6: Do you have an idea similar to the spirit of aloha in your culture? How are aloha
and the idea in your culture similar? How are they different? (relating)

      106
 
 Song 3: Stronger and Stronger

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary

One Title, Several Words – Many Possibilities
Unscramble the Sentences

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Listening Gap-Fill
Musical Words

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

Old Song, New Song
The Halls Are Alive With the Sound of Singing

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: Silly Story

Reading: Jigsaw Reading
Writing: Songwriter Histories

107  
 
Stronger and Stronger: Lyrics
by Daniel Ho
(4:49)

1 I’m sick and tired of hearing that I’ll never have what it takes.
Just need a few words of encouragement and I’ll be okay.
Is love or jealousy preventing you from seeing my way?
With or without your approval, I’ll do it anyway.

(Chorus)
5 I’m getting stronger and stronger with each passing day
Flying higher and higher like a bird flown away
I’m getting closer and closer to finding my way
I just might make it someday.
You know, I just might make it someday.

10 I’m off to chase those silly dreams you always warned me about.
Don’t take it personal. It’s not to prove you wrong but me right.
'Cause you know I’m right you’ll see the light without a shadow of doubt
Was that out loud? Oh well, I’m sorry got no time to fight, no.

CHORUS

14 Yeah, Yeah, Yeah

Maybe someday (2x)

16 It’s not like me to be the one to say, “I told you so.”

But I told you so, I told you so, I told you so, I told you so
I told you so, I told you so, I told you so, I told you so,
In case you missed it, listen carefully, I TOLD YOU SO!
Yeah, Yeah

21 I’m getting stronger and stronger with each passing day

Flying higher and higher like a bird flown away
I’m getting closer and closer to finding my way
I just might make it someday.

CHORUS

25 Looks like I made it

What were you thinking?
What did I tell you?
I told you so
Yeah, Yeah
I told you so, I told you so, I told ya (6x)

108  
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary

Purpose: To generate interest and teach vocabulary related to the song, and activate
background knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following line from the song on the board as the starting
point for brainstorming:
I just might make it someday.

Instructions: See page 17.

One Title, Several Words – Many Possibilities

Purpose: To predict the content, generate interest, and introduce vocabulary for the song

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes, plus the length of the song (4:49 mins.)

Preparation and Materials: Write the title of the song on the board.

Instructions: See page 10. After the initial round of predictions, write the following words and
phrases on the board and get the students to make new predictions:
encouragement finding my way have what it takes someday

Unscramble the Sentences

Purpose: To generate interest in the song, write phrases and sentences, and introduce
vocabulary and grammar from the song

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes, plus the length of the song

Preparation and Materials: Make enough copies of the scrambled sentences (page 110) so
that each group has one sentence to unscramble. Cut apart the phrases (not the individual
words). (Answer key: see lines 1 – 9 in the lyrics on page 108.)

Instructions: See page 13, Modification B. Have students re-order the phrases to create
complete sentences, and then re-order each line to recreate the first two stanzas of the song.

109  
 
Stronger and Stronger: Unscramble the Sentences

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

I’ll never have I’m sick and tired what it takes of hearing that

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

I’ll be okay (I) just need and of encouragement a few words

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

preventing you from Is seeing my way love or jealousy

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

With or without I’ll do it your approval anyway

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

passing day stronger and stronger with each I’m getting

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

higher and higher a bird flown away (I’m) flying like

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

closer and closer my way I’m getting to finding

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

make it I just someday might

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

make it just might You know I someday

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

110  
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song and identifying main ideas in the song

Level: All Time: 10-15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following three discussion questions on the board or
create your own:
Does it seem like a happy or sad song?
Does the song remind you of any other songs you know?
Do you like the song? Why or why not?

Instructions: See page 27.

Listening Gap-Fill

Purpose: To listen for details

Level: 2 and above Time: 25 – 30 minutes (to play the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the gap-fill handout (page 112) for each student.
(Answer key: page 119.)

Instructions: See page 31.

Musical Words

Purpose: To listen for and write specific words or phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Stop the song at the places on the CD suggested below. Optional:
Make a copy of the lyrics (page 108) for each student or group of students.

Instructions: See page 32, Modification A. Use the first three stanzas of the song. Stop the
song after each stanza (see the lyrics on page 108):
Section 1: lines 1 – 4 (0:00 – 0:50)
Section 2: lines 5 – 9 (0:51 – 1:13)
Section 3: lines 10 – 14 (1:14 – 1:54)

111  
 
Stronger and Stronger: Listening Gap-Fill

Directions: First, read through these song lyrics and guess what the missing words might be.
Write your guesses in the blanks. Second, as you listen to the song, correct what you have
written or fill in any missing words.

I’m (1) __________________ and tired of hearing that I’ll (2) __________________ have what
it takes.

Just need a few words of (3) __________________ and I’ll be okay.

Is (4) __________________ or jealousy preventing you from (5) _________________ my way?

With or without your approval, I’ll do it anyway.

I’m getting (6) _________________ and (7) _________________ with each passing day

(8) __________________ higher and higher like a (9) __________________ flown away

I’m getting (10) __________________ and (11) __________________ to finding my way

I just might make it (12) __________________

You know, I just might make it someday.

I’m off to (13) __________________ those silly (14) __________________ you always warned
me about.

Don’t take it personal, it’s not to (15) __________________ you wrong but me right.

'Cause you know I’m right you’ll see the light without a shadow of doubt

Was that out loud? Oh well, I’m (16) __________________ got no time to fight, no.

I’m (17) _________________ stronger and stronger with each (18) ______________ day

(19) __________________ higher and higher like a (20) _________________ flown away

I’m getting (21) __________________ and (22) __________________ to finding my way

I just might make it (23) __________________

You know, I just might make it someday.

112  
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to sing the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the chorus (page 108, lines 5 – 9) on the board or on a large
poster.

Instructions: See page 38, Modification C. Have students sing along with the chorus each
time it occurs in the song (three times).

Old Song, New Song

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: 2 and above Time: 40 – 55 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (page 108) for each group of students.

Instructions: See page 39, Modification B.

The Halls Are Alive With the Sound of Singing

Purpose: To write and perform dramatic dialogue

Level: 3 and above Time: 50 – 70 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (page 108) for each group of students or
write the lyrics on the board.

Instructions: See page 47.

113  
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: Silly Story

Purpose: To tell stories and practice using new vocabulary in sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Silly Story word cards (page 115) for each
group of students.

Instructions: See page 54.

Reading: Jigsaw Reading

Purpose: To summarize information presented in texts, speak and listen in order to present
information, practice note-taking, and collaborate as part of a team

Level: 2 and above Time: 50 – 60 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the note-taking form (page 118) for each student.
Divide the number of students by five and make that many copies of the paragraphs (pages
116-117). See page 60 for instructions on labeling the paragraphs.

Instructions: See page 60, Modification A. Divide students into five groups. Tell students that
they are going to read about some famous people in U.S. history who were not afraid to find
their own way. After completing the jigsaw activity, ask each group to suggest which of these
famous people should receive the award as the strongest person and explain why.

Writing: Songwriter Histories

Purpose: To write short narratives in the past tense

Level: 2 and above Time: 40 – 50 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions: See page 67, Modification A.

114  
 
Stronger and Stronger: Silly Story

approval chase doubt

encouragement
dreams fight

jealousy light listen

love miss prove

see shadow time

warn way words

115  
 
Stronger and Stronger: Jigsaw Reading

Helen Keller Label: _____

Born on June 27, 1880, in Alabama, she became blind and deaf before her
second birthday after suffering from an illness. A teacher named Anne
Sullivan taught Helen how to use sign language when she was six years old,
even though she could not see or hear. Helen Keller later became the first
blind and deaf person to earn a Bachelor of Arts1 degree. She graduated
from Radcliffe College and later wrote books and gave speeches and
lectures. She also worked for the rights of the disabled2 and helped raise
awareness about these issues.
1
Bachelor of Arts the degree given at the end of an undergraduate university education
2
disabled having a physical or mental limitation, often due to illness or injury
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Thomas Edison Label: _____

Born on February 11, 1847, in Ohio, he is famous for inventing the

electric light bulb before electricity was even commercially available.
Some people say that Edison succeeded only after failing 10,000
times with his experiments. He also invented many other devices
such as the motion picture camera, phonograph,1 and mechanical
vote recorder. In fact, the U.S. Patent Office granted him over 1,000
patents.2 While people today may not be familiar with many of his
inventions, his work was the foundation of many modern
technologies.
1
phonograph a device used for playing musical records
2
patent an official document that gives a person or company the right to be the only one that makes or sells a
product for a certain period of time
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Martin Luther King, Jr. Label: _____

Born on January 15, 1929, in Atlanta, Georgia, he was a clergyman1 who

fought against racial segregation2 and discrimination during the Civil
Rights Movement in the 1950s and 1960s. He was influenced by Gandhi,3
and believed in peaceful, nonviolent actions to influence social change. His
goal was to bring civil rights to everyone, regardless of race. He was shot
and killed in 1968 (at age 39) by a man who disagreed with his ideas.
Today a national holiday is celebrated on January 13, his birthday, to honor
him and his work.
1
clergyman a religious leader whose job is serving the needs of his religion and its members
2
racial segregation the practice or policy to keep people of different races separate from each other as a form of
discrimination
3
Gandhi famous leader of the independence movement in India who practiced nonviolent protest

116  
 
Wilbur and Orville Wright Label: _____

The Wright brothers—Wilbur, born on April 16, 1867, and Orville,

born on August 19, 1871—believed that humans could fly if only
they had the right machine: an airplane. After spending years in
their shop working with bicycles and other machinery, eventually
they began trying to build a motorized airplane in 1900. They
experimented by using a homemade wind tunnel1 to help them
develop the design of wings and propellers.2 On December 17,
1903, they finally succeeded in flying the world’s first airplane at
Kitty Hawk, North Carolina. Even today some of the technologies
they developed are still being used in aircraft, such as their
innovative3 technologies for steering, or controlling, an airplane.
1
wind tunnel a long, narrow room through which air is blown in order to test the effects of wind on an airplane
2
propeller a device with two or more blades that turn quickly and cause an aircraft to move
3
innovative introducing or using new ideas or methods

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Susan B. Anthony Label: _____

Born on February 15, 1820, in Massachusetts, Susan B. Anthony

was an advocate1 for women’s rights in the United States during the
1800s. She was an influential figure in getting women the right to
vote and run for political office. In 1872, Anthony was arrested for
voting in the U.S. presidential election at a time when women were
not yet allowed to vote. In addition, Anthony and her colleagues2
also argued that women who did the same work as men should
receive equal pay (instead of earning less than men in the same
jobs), and that women should have the right to own property. She
became the publisher of a political journal that fought for women’s
rights. To pay the costs of publishing the journal herself, she traveled around the country giving
speeches to encourage people to fight for voting rights. More than 70 years after her death, the
United States honored her by producing the Susan B. Anthony dollar, a one-dollar coin
engraved with her portrait.
1
advocate someone who argues for or supports a cause or policy
2
colleague a person who works with you for the same cause

117  
 
Stronger and Stronger: Jigsaw Reading Note-taking Form

Paragraph 1: Helen Keller Paragraph 2: Thomas Edison

Paragraph 3: Martin Luther King, Jr. Paragraph 4: Wilbur and Orville Wright

Paragraph 5: Susan B. Anthony Group Decision:

118  
 
 Stronger and Stronger: Answer Keys

Listening Gap-Fill: Answer Key

I’m (1) __ sick______ and tired of hearing that I’ll (2) __ never_______ have what it takes

Just need a few words of (3) __ encouragement___ and I’ll be okay

Is (4) ____ love_______ or jealousy preventing you from (5) ___ seeing_____ my way?

With or without your approval I’ll do it anyway

I’m getting (6) __ stronger______ and (7) ___ stronger______ with each passing day

(8) ___ Flying_____ higher and higher like a (9) ____ bird_____ flown away

I’m getting (10) ___ closer_____ and (11) ____ closer_____ to finding my way

I just might make it (12) ___ someday_____.

You know, I just might make it (13) ___ someday_____.

I’m off to (14) ____ chase_____ those silly (15) ___ dreams_____ you always warned me about

Don’t take it personal. It’s not to (16) __ prove_______ you wrong but me right.

'Cause you know I’m right you’ll see the light without a shadow of doubt

Was that out loud? Oh well, I’m (17) ____ sorry_____ got no time to fight, no.

I’m (18) ___ getting______ stronger and stronger with each (19) ___ passing____ day

(20) __ Flying_______ higher and higher like a (21) ___ bird______ flown away

I’m getting (22) _____ closer______ and (23) _____ closer______ to finding my way

I just might make it (24) _____ someday______

You know, I just might make it someday.

119  
 
 Song 4: You Made Me Laugh

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

One Title, Several Words – Many Possibilities

Stanza Creation
Unscramble the Sentences

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Mixed-Up Pictures
Musical Words

SINGING

Disappearing Song
Old Song, New Song
Crazy Lyrics

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: Silly Story

Reading: Reading Groups
Writing: Songwriter Histories

      120  
 
You Made Me Laugh: Lyrics
by Omar Kent Dykes
(3:49)

1 Hey there, love.

Heavy like a barge?

And the world by the tail, you couldn’t be a star,

But you made me laugh.

5 You made me cry.

I don’t sit and worry.

I can’t see no reason why.

8 Flew like a bird.

Fought like a tiger.

You left this world for a place much higher.

You made me laugh.

12 You made me cry.

I don’t sit and worry.

Ain’t no use to wonder why.

15 I live on.

Right in your smile.

Think about you mile after mile.

You made me laugh.

You made me cry.

20 I don’t sit and worry.

Ain’t no use to wonder why.

      121  
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

One Title, Several Words – Many Possibilities

Purpose: To predict the content, generate interest, and introduce vocabulary for the song

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes, plus the length of the song (3:49 mins.)

Preparation and Materials: Write the title of the song on the board.

Instructions: See page 10. After the initial round of predictions, write the following words on
the board and have students make new predictions:
laugh cry love smile think left

Stanza Creation

Purpose: To predict the content, generate interest, and introduce vocabulary for the song; and
to write phrases and sentences

Level: 3 and above

Time: 30 – 40 minutes, plus the length of the song (may be extended over several class
sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following keywords from Stanzas 1 – 2 on the board in
random order:
love world star laugh cry flew fought smile think

Instructions: See page 12.

Unscramble the Sentences

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary and grammar for the song, and to
write phrases and sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 25 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Scrambled Sentences handout (page 123) for
each group. (Answer key: page 138.)

Instructions: See page 13. Do not have students re-order the sentences into a stanza after
they have unscrambled the sentences.

      122  
 
You Made Me Laugh: Unscramble the Sentences

Directions: Each sentence below has been scrambled – the words are mixed up. For each
sentence, put the words in the correct order to form grammatical and sensible sentences.

1. star be You couldn’t a

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

2. you laugh But made me

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

3. cry You me made

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

4. don’t here I sit worry and

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

5. left higher place You world this for much a

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

      123  
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song

Level: All Time: 10 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following three discussion questions on the board, or
create your own:
Does it seem like a happy or sad song?
What do you learn about the person who is singing this song?
Does the song remind you of any other songs you know?

Instructions: See page 27.

Mixed-Up Pictures

Purpose: To listen for specific words

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Hang the pictures (pages 125-132) on the board. (Answer key:
page 138.)

Instructions: See page 28. Have the students write numbers 1 – 8 on their papers.

Musical Words

Purpose: To listen for and write specific words or phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 25 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Stop the song at the places on the CD suggested below. Optional:
make a copy of the lyrics (page 121) for each student or group of students.

Instructions: See page 32. Stop the song after each stanza (see the lyrics on page 121):
Section 1: lines 1 – 7 (0:00 – 1:05)
Section 2: lines 8 – 14 (1:06 – 1:36)
Section 3: lines 15 – 21 (1:37 – end)

      124  
 
You Made Me Laugh: Mixed-Up Pictures

BARGE

      125  
 
 THINK

      126  
 
 LOVE

      127  
 
 BIRD

      128  
 
 SMILE

      129  
 
 STAR

      130  
 
 HEAVY

      131  
 
 TIGER

      132  
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Disappearing Song

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation, and to recall words and phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 25 – 30 minutes (to sing the song four times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the song lyrics (page 121) on the board.

Instructions: See page 38. Stop after Step 4 (when 50% of the words remain).

Old Song, New Song

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: 2 and above Time: 40 – 55 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (page 121) for each group of students or
write the lyrics on the board.

Instructions: See page 39.

Crazy Lyrics

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words, use different parts of speech, and think about why
words are appropriate or inappropriate in particular contexts

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Crazy Lyrics handout (page 134) for each
group of students.

Instructions: See page 46.

      133  
 
You Made Me Laugh: Crazy Lyrics

Group Recorder: Do not show this handout to the rest of your group. Ask your group members
to give you a word that fits the description in parentheses underneath the line. Write in the
words that your group members suggest. For example, you could say, “Give me an adjective,”
and your group members might reply, “heavy.” Then write “heavy” in the first blank. Next ask
them, “Give me a noun for a thing,” etc. When you have filled in all the blanks, read or sing the
new song to your group.

Hey there, love.

_________________ like a ___________________?

(adjective) (noun – thing)

And the world by the tail, you couldn’t be a star.

But you made me ___________________.

(verb – action)

You made me ____________________.

(verb – action)

I don’t sit and worry.

I can’t see no reason why.

__________________________ like a ____________________.

(verb – action, past tense) (noun – animal)

__________________________ like a ___________________.

(verb – action, past tense) (noun – animal)

You left this world for a place much higher.

You made me ___________________.

(verb – action)

You made me ___________________.

(verb – action)

I don’t sit and worry.

Ain’t no use to wonder why.

      134  
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: Silly Story

Purpose: To tell stories and practice using new vocabulary in sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Silly Story word cards (page 136) for each
group of students.

Instructions: See page 54.

Reading: Reading Groups

Purpose: To practice reading comprehension skills, conduct research, think critically, and
collaborate as part of a team

Level: 3 and above

Time: 45 – 50 minutes in class (groups may need much more time outside of class)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading (page 137) for each student. Assign
this project as a group activity. Give the group one week to prepare. Provide students with
colored pens/markers, glue, and paper for making posters as needed.

Instructions: See page 64.

Writing: Songwriter Histories

Purpose: To write short narratives in the past tense

Level: 2 and above Time: 40 – 50 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions: See page 67.

      135  
 
You Made Me Laugh: Silly Story

barge bird cry

flew fought heavy

laugh live love

mile sit smile

star tail think

tiger world worry

      136  
 
 The Blues: An Iconic Style of American Music

The blues is a genre of music that originated1 in the southern United States in the late 1800s.
The blues came from African-American musical traditions including the songs from the time of
slavery. Originally, most blues music was sung by an individual performer, accompanied on a
guitar or harmonica 2and focused on themes about sadness, difficulties, and bad luck. After the
end of slavery, many African Americans began migrating and
taking the blues all over the United States with them. Over time the
blues evolved and became an iconic 3style of truly American
music. Despite the changes the music has undergone over time,
the themes of the blues have continued to focus on sorrow4 and
melancholy5 but with an underlying sense of determination. In fact,
“singing the blues” is a common impression that Americans use to
indicate that someone is feeling sorry for themselves or
complaining about a situation.

In addition to the theme of the music, the blues are characterized

by the use of certain instruments, sounds, and rhythms. The song
“You Made Me Laugh” belongs to a specific genre called electric
blues, a major style that began in the 1930s and gradually became
more popular in Chicago, Memphis, and Texas in the 1940s. The
style typically features the electric guitar, harmonica, and a rhythm
section consisting of bass guitar and drums. The harmonica solos
at the beginning, middle, and end of “You Made Me Laugh,” as well
as the sounds of the guitars and drums in the background, are all
typical of this kind of blues.

The sounds and lyrics of blues music seem to work together to

harmonica
create catharsis, the opportunity for emotional release for the
singer. For example, in the song “You Made Me Laugh,” singer
Omar Kent Dykes pays tribute to his wife, who had recently passed away.6 Dykes sings about a
person he loved who has “left this world for a place much higher.” Although he will continue to
remember the loved one he has lost and the good times spent with her, he tries to go on with
his life instead of being bogged down7 by worry and sadness. There is certainly a mood of
despondence8 that comes through in the melody and the singer’s voice, but also a note of
determination and perhaps even optimism9 that can be heard throughout the song. The
juxtaposition10 of these two seemingly contradictory emotions is possibly what enables the
blues genre to have such a therapeutic11 effect on its listeners and such appeal to its fans.

                                                                                                           
1
originate come from, start, or begin to exist
2
 harmonica    a small musical instrument that is played with your mouth. It has many small openings that produce
different sounds when air is blown or sucked through them  
3
 iconic from icon, a widely known symbol  
4
sorrow a feeling of sadness or grief caused especially by the loss of someone or something
5
melancholy a sad mood or feeling
6
pass away die
7
be bogged down feeling of being stuck or prevented from doing something
8
despondence a feeling of sadness and hopelessness
9
optimism a feeling or belief that good things will happen in the future
10
juxtaposition placement of different things together to create an interesting effect or to show how they are the
same or different
11
therapeutic having the effect of making someone feel better

      137  
 
 You Made Me Laugh: Answer Keys

Unscramble the Sentences: Answer Key

1. You couldn’t be a star.
2. But you made me laugh.
3. You made me cry.
4. I don’t sit here and worry.
5. You left this world for a much higher place.

Mixed-Up Pictures: Answer Key

1. love
2. heavy
3. barge
4. star
5. bird
6. tiger
7. smile
8. think

      138  
 
 Song 5: A Lot of Days Are Gone

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

Picture Predictions
Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary
What Do You Know About…?

LISTENING

Mixed-Up Lyrics
Listening for Rhyming Words
Musical Words

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

Disappearing Song
Drum and Instrument Circles

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: Silly Story

Reading: Our Land, Your Land
Writing: I Think This Song Rocks!

139
 
A Lot of Days Are Gone: Lyrics
by The Hacienda Brothers (written by Dave Gonzalez & Jeb Schoonover)
(3:08)

1 A lot of days are gone,

But I’m still holding onto what they used to be
Back when it was yesterday
The future seemed so far away
And there was always time, but now it’s slipped away.

6 A lot of things went wrong,

And all I’m holding onto now are memories.
Things I knew I shouldn’t do, things I wish I did
Back in time, when I was just a kid.

Chorus (2x):
10 Time is just a way of counting yesterdays
But good times never hang around
Long enough to stay.
Yesterdays are memories, and some might fade away.
Others last forever with a price I’ll have to pay.

15 A lot of things are gone,

And nothing comes along that means that much to me.
‘Cause nothing ever could compare
To what we had when you were here
Back when you were holding onto me.

20 No, nothing ever could compare

To what we had when you were here
Back when you were holding onto me.

140
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Picture Predictions

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the picture of the sad cowboy and guitar (page 142) on the
board. Write the title of the song on the board underneath the picture.

Instructions: See page 18. Optional: you may wish to share the ‘Information for Teachers’ on
page 142 with the students after hearing their predictions.

Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write this word on the board as the starting point for
brainstorming:
regrets
Instructions: See page 17.

What Do You Know About…?

Purpose: To generate interest in the song, and activate background knowledge about country
music and cowboys

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the quiz (pages 143-144) for each group of
students. (Answer key: page 151.)

Instructions: See page 16. Tell students that the quiz is about a style of music called country
music and the American cowboy. Note: fiddle is another term for violin, and is commonly used
to refer to this instrument when it is used in country and western music. Also see the reading
text on page 150 for more information.

141
 
A Lot of Days Are Gone: Picture Predictions

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Information for Teachers:

Country and western music is often associated with the American cowboy, and usually
tells sad stories about loss and regret. In fact, many country-western singers dress like
American cowboys even though they do not work on ranches. The guitar is a common
instrument in this type of music.

142
 
A Lot of Days Are Gone: What Do You Know About…?

Country music is a popular type of music in the United States, especially in the open prairies of
the western United States. What do you know about this type of music and where it comes
from?

Matching: Instruments
Each of the following instruments is used in many country music songs. Can you match the
instrument with its name?

harmonica drums guitar fiddle banjo

1. __________________ 2. __________________ 3. __________________

4. __________________ 5. __________________

Multiple Choice: All About Cowboys

Many country musicians perform in “western wear,” or the clothes of traditional American
cowboys. But who is the American cowboy? Look at the following picture of a cowboy at work.
Then choose the best answer for each question below.

143
 
6. Who is a cowboy?
a. a person who rides cows
b. a person who works on a ranch, often taking care of cows
c. a young boy who likes cows
d. a young, male cow

7. Ranches are usually big, open properties where large animals that live in herds are often
raised. Which of the following animals might live on a ranch?
a. horses
b. cows and sheep
c. buffalo
d. all of the above

8. What does a cowboy ride while doing his work?

a. a horse
b. a train
c. a camel
d. a donkey

9. Look at the pictures below. Which articles of clothing do cowboys wear? Circle all that apply.

a. cowboy hat b. sneakers c. boots d. leather gloves

e. baseball cap f. denim shirt g. sweater h. jeans i. bandana

10. Why do cowboys wear long pants and shirts made out of heavy materials, sturdy boots,
hats, and bandanas?
a. to stay cool in the hot weather
b. to be noticeable in the dark
c. to stay clean
d. to protect themselves from the sun, dust storms, cold weather, and plants

144
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Mixed-Up Lyrics

Purpose: To listen for specific words or phrases, and make print and sound connections

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 25 minutes (to play the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the handout (page 146) for each group of
students. Cut apart the lines and mix them up. (Answer key: see the lyrics on page 140.)

Instructions: See page 27.

Listening for Rhyming Words

Purpose: To listen for details, and recognize and discriminate between similar sounds

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (page 140) for each student or pair of
students. (Answer key: page 151.)

Instructions: See page 30, Modification C. Tell students to find all the rhyming words at the
ends of lines.

Musical Words

Purpose: To listen for and write specific words or phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Stop the song at the places on the CD suggested below, or
choose your own. Optional: make a copy of the lyrics (page 140) for each student or group of
students.

Instructions: See page 32. Stop the song after each stanza (see the lyrics on page 140):
Section 1: lines 1 – 5 (0:00 – 0:29)
Section 2: lines 6 – 9 (0:30 – 0:47)
Section 3: lines 10 – 14 (0:48 – 1:15)
Section 4: lines 10 – 14, repeated (1:16 – 2:20)
Section 5: lines 15 – 19 (2:21 – 2:48)
Section 6: lines 20 – 22 (2:49 – end)

145
 
A Lot of Days Are Gone: Mixed-Up Lyrics

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A lot of days are gone,
But I’m still holding onto what they used to be
Back when it was yesterday
The future seemed so far away
And there was always time, but now it’s slipped away.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A lot of things went wrong,
And all I’m holding onto now are memories.
Things I knew I shouldn’t do, things I wish I did
Back in time, when I was just a kid.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time is just a way of counting yesterdays
But good times never hang around
Long enough to stay.
Yesterdays are memories, and some might fade away.
Others last forever with a price I’ll have to pay.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time is just a way of counting yesterdays
But good times never hang around
Long enough to stay.
Yesterdays are memories, and some might fade away.
Others last forever with a price I’ll have to pay.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A lot of things are gone,
And nothing comes along that means that much to me
‘Cause nothing ever could compare
To what we had when you were here
Back when you were holding onto me.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No, nothing ever could compare
To what we had when you were here
Back when you were holding onto me.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

146
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to sing the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the chorus (page 140, lines 10 – 14) on the board or on a
large poster.

Instructions: See page 38, Modification C. Have students sing along with the chorus each
time it occurs in the song (two times).

Disappearing Song

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation, and recall words and phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 25 minutes (to sing the song four times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the lyrics (page 140) on the board.

Instructions: See page 38. Stop after Step 4 (when 50% of the words remain).

Drum and Instrument Circles

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: All Time: 20 – 30 minutes (to sing the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Collect and bring in different types of drums or instruments. If you
cannot do this, then students can clap their hands or tap on the desks.

Instructions: See page 43.

147
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: Silly Story

Purpose: To tell stories, and practice using new vocabulary in sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Silly Story word cards (page 149) for each
group of students.

Instructions: See page 54.

Reading: Our Land, Your Land

Purpose: To think critically, make connections between the reading and the world, practice
comparative adjectives, and develop an understanding of geography

Level: 3 and above Time: 40 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text (page 150) and the U.S. map
(page 63) for each student. Prepare a map of your own country, and gather information about
the geographical features of both countries.

Instructions: See page 62. Have students read the text for comprehension. In addition to the
geographical features mentioned in the text (mountains, farmland, plains, prairies, rivers), have
students identify cities like Nashville, where the music industry is centered.

Writing: I Think This Song Rocks!

Purpose: To critically evaluate a piece of music, and write a short persuasive song reviews

Level: 3 and above Time: 40 – 50 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Gather information about song reviews.

Instructions: See page 68. Use the following topics to help students brainstorm words to use
in their reviews:
Instruments heard in “A Lot of Days Are Gone”
Nouns and adjectives to describe the singer’s emotions
Adjectives to describe the beat or rhythm of the song

148
 
A Lot of Days Are Gone: Silly Stories

count yesterday time

stay far away slip away

hold on future compare

pay fade away memories

forever price wish

149
 
 The Melodies of Cowboys: Country Western Music

A lot of things went wrong, and all I’m holding onto now are memories
- Hacienda Brothers, A Lot of Days Are Gone

Do you ever look back at something that happened in your life and wish that it had turned out1
differently? Do you ever feel sad when thinking about memories of the past? In the song A Lot
of Days Are Gone, the Hacienda Brothers (a country western music band) sing a story of a lost
love and of regrets for life events that didn’t turn out right. Stories of regret and lost love are
common in today’s country western music. Where do you think country
western music came from? Can you use the two words country and
western to guess where this music developed?

The name country western music reflects the origins of the music. In the
early 1900s, two similar musical styles developed in different areas of the
United States: (1) the southern parts of the Appalachian Mountains in the
East, and (2) the plains and prairies of the western states. Because of the
hilly land in the Appalachian Mountains, small farms that grew crops like
tobacco, sweet potatoes, and corn were common. Most people lived on
these small farms or in small rural communities, rather than large cities.
That is, they lived in the country! Their music, which focused on telling
stories and often used a banjo, is one of the origins of today’s country
western music. Landscape in Appalachia

On the other side of the country, the landscape of the western states is much different than in
the Appalachian Mountains. The West has many large prairies and plains. These expansive,2
flat lands are filled with grasses and shrubs, and are home to many ranches. Ranches are
usually large properties where herds3 of cattle, sheep, and horses are raised. Cowboys on
horseback who tended to these herds often played instruments like the guitar and the banjo,
and sang when out on the range tending the animals. That brought western into country western
music. Today, many country western musicians dress like
cowboys. They wear jeans, large belt buckles, western-
style shirts, and even cowboy hats. It’s no surprise that
country western music is sometimes called “cowboy”
music!

Over time people began to use the term country western

Cowboys on a Western plain
music to refer to the music from these two areas. Today
this genre is one of the most popular types of music in the United States. Nashville, Tennessee
has become a center for the country western music industry. In fact, many of the most famous
country western music stars live in or near Nashville.

 
1
turn out to end or resolve in a certain way
     expansive
2                                    very
             large,
                 covering
                         a      large
  area
3
herd a group of animals that live or are kept together  
150
 
 A Lot of Days Are Gone: Answer Keys

Listening for Rhyming Words: Answer Key

line *starred words are near rhymes
1, 6, 15 *gone, *wrong
2, 16, 19, 22 be, me, me, me
3, 4, 5, 12, 13, 14 yesterday, away, away, stay, away, pay
7, 8 did, kid

What Do You Know About…? Answer Key

1. drums
2. banjo
3. guitar
4. fiddle
5. harmonica
6. b. a person who works on a ranch, often taking care of cows or cattle
7. d. all of the above (all of these animals are large and are usually raised in herds that
roam and graze on large ranches)
8. a. a horse
9. a. cowboy hat; c. boots; d. leather gloves, f. denim shirt; h. jeans, i. bandana
10. d. to protect themselves from the sun, dust storms, cold weather, hard work, and plants
(shrubs, cactus, or bushes)
 

151
 
 Song 6: Good Morning, New Orleans

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

Four Corners
How Many Questions in a Minute
What Do You Know About…?

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Listening Gap-Fill
Song Bingo

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

Disappearing Song
Old Song, New Song

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: What Do YOU Think?

Reading: Reading Groups
Writing: Songwriter Histories

152
 
Good Morning, New Orleans

by Kermit Ruffins
(3:34)

1 Good morning, New Orleans (Good Morning, New Orleans)

We love you, New Orleans (We love you, New Orleans)
It’s such a lovely thing to love New Orleans
When people come they never leave because we’re swingin’ that way.

5 The sunshine’s so, so bright (the sun shines oh so bright)

The breeze is so, so nice (the breeze is oh so nice)
The star lights twinkle all night down by the riverside
So bye and bye sometimes I cry it’s such a beautiful sight.

9 Some people wonder what all this talk is about (New Orleans)
But if you love her, you know what I mean.

11 Good Morning, New Orleans (Good Morning, New Orleans)

We love you, New Orleans (We love you, New Orleans)
I feel like I’m a king when I lay down and dream
About my people that all live here. We just love her so much.

15 Ba boop beeeee biggitty bahp-bahp-bahhh-bah dweee dee zane bah-boo-dwee dee

zahhhn
co bah-bo det-un debobahhp bah-boo de zeee buu buu behpbehp unbeeee bahhp
bwaah
buh beep boo-boo-boo beep beep bahp boop boop booo-szweee
boopbwedodededwedskiddlydapbumsdfadvasdfvgshdbsd
bee bee beeeun beebee bahp bahp bu dzeee dsee deee
baahh bahpp boo dee dee tzsae tzeee tzaap-unzoozaaaate

20 Good Morning, New Orleans (Good Morning, New Orleans)

We love you, New Orleans (We love you, New Orleans)
I feel like I’m a king when I lay down and dream
About the people that all live here, and how we love her so much.

153
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Four Corners

Purpose: To generate interest in the song, and activate background knowledge about New
Orleans

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes, plus the length of the song (3:34 mins.)

Preparation and Materials: Write the title of the song on the board. Hang the pictures of New
Orleans (pages 155-158) around the classroom.

Instructions: See page 9, Modification D. After students have explained their choice of picture,
you can tell them the information about New Orleans listed below each picture and let them
change their opinion.

How Many Questions in a Minute?

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, activate background
knowledge about the topic, and practice asking and answering questions

Level: 3 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the large picture of the street jazz band (page 157) on the
board.

Instructions: See page 23. After completing the activity, you can share some of the
‘Information for Teachers’ (page 157) with the students.

What Do You Know About…?

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes, plus the length of the song (3:34 mins.)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the quiz (page 159) for each group of students.
(Answer key: page 168.)

Instructions: See page 16.

154
 
Good Morning, New Orleans: Four Corners

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Information for Teachers:

Although New Orleans is a modern city with skyscrapers and large office buildings, it is better
known for its historical architecture. The buildings pictured here show architecture that is
common in the French Quarter. The French Quarter is the oldest neighborhood in New Orleans,
and the buildings called Creole Townhouses show influences from Spanish, French, African and
Caribbean architecture. Typical of these buildings are the iron balconies, colorful stucco walls,
and tile roofs.

155
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Information for Teachers:

Mardi Gras (pronounced “grah”) is an internationally celebrated holiday, which has become the
signature holiday for New Orleans. During Mardi Gras, which is observed just before the six
weeks of Lent preceding Easter, celebrators wear colorful (often purple, green, and gold)
costumes and masks (as pictured above) at masquerade balls and king cake parties. Parades
are common where necklaces or strings of colorful plastic beads are thrown.

156
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Information for Teachers:

New Orleans has a deep connection with jazz music as well as ensembles of brass instruments
(such as tubas, trombones, and trumpets) and marching bands. Many people consider New
Orleans the birthplace of jazz. It’s not uncommon to see groups performing on the streets of
New Orleans (as pictured above), and the city even has its own musical traditions. For example,
funeral processions in New Orleans are sometimes accompanied by a brass band that marches
from the church to the cemetery playing sad music. After the burial, however, the band returns
from the cemetery playing upbeat jazz music, in what has come to be called “a jazz funeral”.

157
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Information for Teachers:

New Orleans is located on the Mississippi River and is the largest city in the state of Louisiana.
The city straddles the river, and tourists can ride a ferryboat across the river to visit the various
neighborhoods of New Orleans on the other side. The Natchez is an old-fashioned steamboat
with a calliope (a musical instrument fitted with steam whistles), which tours the Mississippi
River twice daily.

158
 
Good Morning, New Orleans: What Do You Know About…?

We are going to listen to a song called Good Morning, New Orleans, performed by Kermit
Ruffins, a native New Orleans jazz musician. Kermit Ruffins really loves New Orleans! Answer
the following questions about the city of New Orleans.

I. Multiple Choice. The Facts about New Orleans

1. New Orleans is a city located in the state of _______________________.

A. Texas B. Louisiana C. Georgia D. Missouri

2. New Orleans sits on a big body of water, the ______________________.

A. Mississippi River B. Gulf of Mexico C. Atlantic Ocean

3. New Orleans is the birthplace of _____________ music.

A. rap B. country C. jazz D. folk

4. The weather in New Orleans is usually _____________________.

A. hot in summer, mild in winter B. mild in summer, cold in winter

C. very cold and snowy in winter D. desert-like

II. True or False? Really? I Don’t Believe it!

5. New Orleans is nicknamed “The Big Easy”, perhaps reflecting the easy-going pace of life.

true false

6. New Orleans is nicknamed “The Crescent City” because the Mississippi River forms a
crescent shape around the city.

true false

7. New Orleans is the only city in the United States where Mardi Gras is celebrated.

true false

8. New Orleans is nicknamed “NOLA”, which stands for New Orleans LouisianA

true false

159
 
Good Morning, New Orleans: What Do You Know About…? (quiz continued)

III. Matching. You Want Me to Eat WHAT?

Each of the following foods is typical of New Orleans. Many foods have Creole, Cajun, or
French influences, and use seafood from the nearby bodies of water. Can you match the food
with its name and description?

Foods: gumbo a stew made with okra, tomatoes, and seafood

crayfish a shellfish (that looks like a small lobster) that is boiled
oysters small mollusks eaten out of their opened shells
jambalaya a rice dish with shrimp, oysters and ham

9. ___________________ 10. _____________________

11. ___________________ 12. _____________________

160
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following discussion questions on the board, or create
your own.
Who is the person singing this song?
What is he singing about?
Is this song happy or sad? Why do you think so?

Instructions: See page 27.

Listening Gap-Fill

Purpose: To listen for details

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the gap-fill handout (page 162) for each student.
(Answer key: see lyrics, page 153)

Instructions: See page 31.

Song Bingo

Purpose: To listen for specific words and phrases, introduce vocabulary from the song, and
make print and sound connections

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following words from the song on the board in random
order:
good morning love lovely people swingin’ shine bright
breeze nice star twinkle night riverside beautiful city
cry king dream talk live

Instructions: See page 33.

161
 
Good Morning, New Orleans: Listening Gap-Fill

Directions: First, read through these song lyrics and guess what the missing words might be.
Write your guesses in the blanks. Second, as you listen to the song, correct what you have
written and fill in any missing words.

Good (1) ________________, New Orleans (Good (2) ________________, New Orleans)

We love you, (3) __________________ (We love you, (4) ________________)

It’s such a lovely thing to love (5) __________________

When people come they never (6) ____________ because we’re swingin’ that way.

The (7) ________________ so, so bright (the sun shines oh so bright)

The breeze is so, so (8) _________________ (the breeze is oh so (9) ________________)

The star lights twinkle (10) _________________ down by the (10) ______________,

So bye and bye sometimes I cry it’s such a (12) __________________ sight.

Some (13) _________________ wonder what all this talk is about (New Orleans)

But if you (14) ________________, you know what I mean.

Good (15) _______________, New Orleans (Good (16) ________________, New Orleans)

We love you, (17) ___________________ (We love you, (18) ________________)

I feel like I’m a (19) ________________ when I lay down and (20) ________________

About my people that all (21) _________________ here. We just love her so much.

Ba boop beeeee biggitty bahp-bahp-bahhh-bah dweee dee zane bah-boo-dwee dee

zahhhn …..

Good (22) __________________, New Orleans (Good (23) ________________, New Orleans)

We love you, (24) ________________________ (We love you, (25) ___________________)

I feel like I’m a (26) _________________ when I lay down and (27) _________________

About the people that all (28) __________________ here, and how we love her so much.

162
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to sing the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the song lyrics (page 153) on the board or on a large poster.

Instructions: See page 38, Modification B. Divide students into two groups. As you point to the
words on the board, one group sings the first part of the lines, and the other group sings the
words in parentheses. Example from line 5:
Group 1 sings: The sunshine’s so, so bright
Group 2 sings: (The sun shines oh so bright)

Disappearing Song

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation, and recall words and phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes (to sing the song four times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the song lyrics (page 153) on the board.

Instructions: See page 38. Stop after Step 4 (when 50% of the words remain).

Old Song, New Song

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: 2 and above Time: 40 – 55 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the song lyrics (page 153) for each group of
students, or write them on the board.

Instructions: See page 39.

163
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: What Do YOU Think?

Purpose: To ask and answer questions, and to summarize and present information

Level: 3 and above Time: 30 – 40 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Pre-teach the concept of surveys and their results: the purpose of
a survey, types of questions, how to calculate and present results.

Instructions: See page 50, Modification B. Possible survey topics:

1. Strengths and weaknesses of the students’ hometown
2. Jazz music
3. Reasons to like or dislike a particular city

Reading: Reading Groups

Purpose: To practice reading comprehension skills, conduct research, think critically, and
collaborate as part of a team

Level: 3 and above

Time: 45 – 50 minutes in class (groups may need much more time outside of class)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text (page 165) for each student.
Assign this project as a group activity. Give the group one week to prepare. Provide students
with colored pens/markers, glue, and paper for making posters as needed.

Instructions: See page 64.

Writing: Songwriter Histories

Purpose: To write short narratives in the past tense

Level: 2 and above Time: 40 – 50 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the handout (page 167) for each group of
students.

Instructions: See page 67, Modification C.

164
 
 Jazz in the United States

The song “Good Morning, New Orleans” by Kermit Ruffins is an example of jazz, a popular
musical genre of the United States. Jazz got its start at the beginning of the 1900s in New
Orleans, a city in the South. Other important cities in the history of jazz are Saint Louis, Kansas
City, and Chicago. According to legend, jazz traveled up the Mississippi River to these central
and northern cities.

Jazz music is important to American history because it

combines musical traditions from European immigrants1
and African slaves.2 During the eighteenth and nineteenth
centuries, many Europeans from Ireland, Italy, France, the
United Kingdom, and Germany immigrated to the United
States. The Atlantic slave trade brought many Africans to the
United States until slavery was abolished3 by the
Emancipation Proclamation in 1863.

Many customs and musical traditions came with European

immigrants and African slaves, and weren’t abandoned after
they settled in the United States. Rather they were passed
down through children and children’s children. Over time
musical traditions blended together into a new style of music.
This new style of music included many of the rhythms and
melodies4 common to African musical traditions. From
European traditions, the style adopted many instruments as
well as the use of harmonies.5 The result is the unique6 style
of music today called jazz.

How is jazz special? When you hear a jazz song, the melody
is usually played first and then repeated several times.
Popular instruments for jazz are traditionally the saxophone,
trumpet, trombone, piano, drums, clarinet, tuba, string bass,
and banjo. Nowadays jazz musicians also use the vibraphone, cello, and guitar. What
instruments did you hear during the song?

The focus of jazz is often on how the performers improvise or make up tunes as they play with
the melody. Many styles of jazz have developed since the early twentieth century. In one style,
singers sometimes sing lyrics with no meaning. This style of jazz is called “scat” and is heard in
“Good Morning, New Orleans”. Do you remember the lyrics “ba boop beeeee biggitty”? This is
an example of scat, because these sounds have no meaning in English.

                                                                                                           
1
immigrant a person who moves to a new country to live
2
slave a person who is owned by another person, and who is forced to work for that person without being paid
3
abolish to officially stop or end something
4
melody a pleasing series of musical notes that form the main part of a song or piece of music
5
harmony the combination of different musical notes played or sung at the same time to produce a pleasing sound
6
unique unlike anything or anyone else; very special  

165
 
 Top row, from left to right: saxophone, trumpet, string bass
Bottom row, from left to right: clarinet, trombone, banjo

 
 

166
 
Good Morning, New Orleans: Songwriter Histories

Directions: In your group, create a sequence of events that could have led up to the writing of
the song, Good Morning, New Orleans. Fill in the blank comic strip below with your drawings of
the events and write brief dialogues to go along with the drawings.

1) 2)

“ “

” ”

3) 4)

“ “

” ”

167
 
 Good Morning, New Orleans: Answer Keys

What Do You Know About…?: Answer Key

1. B. Louisiana
2. A. Mississippi River
3. C. jazz
4. A. hot in summer, mild in winter
5. True
6. True
7. False. While Mardi Gras is not observed nationally across the country, a number of cities
and regions in the United States have notable Carnival celebrations.”
8. True
9. oysters
10. crayfish
11. gumbo
12. jambalaya  

168
 
 Song 7: Simple Down

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

Four Corners
Find Someone Who…
Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Did You Hear What I Heard?
Mixed-Up Lyrics

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

Show Me the Word
Your Moves

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: Small Group Discussion and Summary

Reading: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details
Writing: Story Extensions

      169  
 
Simple Down

by Lael Neale
(4:13)

1 These wheelers and dealers

Trying to sell us trinkets and rings
But there is no real value on these things
And I want to simple down.

5 My closet and my trunk

Are filled with so much junk
I thought it made me happy
But I just feel sunk
And I want to simple down.
Oh, I want to simple down.

11 Sail the six-lane highways

We’re married to machines
And despite our lives of excess
We are filled with emptiness
And oh, all the little birds
Sing for all the trees
Please, please, please
Be good to me.

19 I bought a new white dress,

Sunglasses, silks, and scarves.
I’ve tried to buy my happiness
But can’t buy that or love,
And so I want to simple down.

24 So come away with me.

Let’s quit this crazy town.
In a valley by a river
We will not be found.
Let’s move to the mountains
Where the dirt is rich and brown
Where the garden grows
And the rooster crows
Someplace…
Someplace to simple down.
Oh, I want to simple down. (3X)

      170  
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Four Corners

Purpose: To generate interest in the song, and express opinions and make choices about
controversial ideas/statements

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Label four corners or areas of the classroom with these signs:
Strongly Agree Agree Disagree Strongly Disagree

Instructions: See page 9. Write the following controversial statements on the board (but only
one at a time):
1. Advertisements and media turn people into consumers.
2. People have become obsessed with the desire to obtain material possessions.
3. Material things are the least important things in life.
4. Money brings stress and strain instead of happiness.

Find Someone Who…

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, activate background
knowledge about the topic, and practice asking and answering questions

Level: 2 and above Time: 30 minutes, plus the length of the song (4:13 minutes)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the questions (page 172) for each student or
group of students, or write the questions on the board.

Instructions: See page 14.

Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following word from the song on the board as the
starting point for the brainstorming: happiness

Instructions: See page 17.

      171  
 
Simple Down: Find Someone Who…

1. Is your closet filled with junk?

2. Do you like to buy trinkets?

3. Would you like to be a car dealer or salesperson?

4. Are you feeling sunk today?

5. Do you think that trinkets are worth very little?

6. Would you rather be where the garden grows and the rooster crows instead of in class?

7. Would you like to live in a big city?

8. If you could, would you move to the mountains or countryside?

Simple Down: Answer Keys

Did You Hear What I Heard? Answer Key

1. The singer wants to tell listeners that a simple life is a happier life, and that people do
not need to own lots of things in order to be happy.
2. trinkets, rings, a white dress, sunglasses, silks, scarves
3. lines 14 – 15, 23 – 30

      172  
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song

Level: All Time: 10 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following discussion questions on the board, or create
your own:
What feelings or images does this song evoke?
Does the singer’s style remind you of any other singer? Who?
Would you listen to this song again outside of class? Why or why not? Where and when?

Instructions: See page 27.

Did You Hear What I Heard?

Purpose: To listen for main ideas and specific details

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song one or two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following questions on the board:

1. What message does the singer have for the listeners? Do you agree with it?
Why or why not?
2. What material objects are mentioned in the song?
3. Which lines of the song are related to a simple way of life?

Instructions: See page 34. (Answer key: see page 172.)

Mixed-Up Lyrics

Purpose: To listen for specific words or phrases, and make print and sound connections

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 25 minutes (to play the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the handout (page 174) for each group of
students. Cut apart the lines and mix them up. (Answer key: see the song lyrics on page 172.)

Instructions: See page 27.

      173  
 
Simple Down: Mixed-Up Lyrics
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
These wheelers and dealers
Trying to sell us trinkets and rings
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
But there is no real value on these things
And I want to simple down.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
My closet and my trunk
Are filled with so much junk
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I thought it made me happy
But I just feel sunk
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
And I want to simple down.
Oh, I want to simple down.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sail the six-lane highways
We’re married to machines
And despite our lives of excess
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
We are filled with emptiness
And oh, all the little birds
Sing for all the trees
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please, please, please
Be good to me.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I bought a new white dress,
Sunglasses, silks, and scarves
I’ve tried to buy my happiness
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
But can’t buy that or love
And so I want to simple down.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
So come away with me.
Let’s quit this crazy town
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
In a valley by a river
We will not be found.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Let’s move to the mountains
Where the dirt is rich and brown
Where the garden grows
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
And the rooster crows
Someplace…
Someplace to simple down.
Oh, I want to simple down.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
      174  
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.
Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to sing the song one or two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the lyrics (page 170) on the board or on a large poster.

Instructions: See page 38.

Show Me the Word

Purpose: To make print and sound connections, and learn the vocabulary from the song

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the large pictures (pages 176-183) on the board.

Instructions: See page 41, Modification D.

Your Moves

Purpose: To learn vocabulary from the song, and represent word meanings with actions

Level: All Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the song lyrics (page 170) for each student, or
write the lyrics on the board.

Instructions: See page 42, Modification A. Get the students to come up with a mime to
represent each line of the song.

      175  
 
Simple Down: Show Me the Word

trinkets
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

six-lane highways
      176  
 
 rings
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

trunk
      177  
 
 birds
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

feel sunk
      178  
 
 white dress
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

mountains

      179  
 
 trees
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

garden

      180  
 
 sunglasses
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

rooster

      181  
 
 scarves
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

buy

      182  
 
 river
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

love

      183  
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: Small Group Discussion and Summary

Purpose: To think critically and express opinions

Level: 3 and above Time: 25 – 35 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the discussion questions (page 185) for each
group of students.

Instructions: See page 53.

Reading: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details

Purpose: To write and answer questions that focus on main ideas and details

Level: 3 and above Time: 30 – 40 minutes (part of this activity is assigned as homework)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text (page 186) for each student. As
homework, assign each student to read the text and write either one main idea question or one
detail question.

Instructions: See page 59.

Writing: Story Extensions

Purpose: To write creative narratives

Level: 2 and above Time: 45 – 55 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the song lyrics (page 170) for each group of
students, or write the lyrics on the board.

Instructions: See page 70, Modification B. Ask students to write a story about what happens
to the singer after the song. Where does she decide to live? What is her life like there?

      184  
 
Simple Down: Small Group Discussion and Summary

Directions: Read the following situation, and then respond to the discussion questions below. Be
ready to summarize what your group has discussed.

Situation:
Sally has a dilemma. She has been working in a big company for a long time. She has a very
hard job. She usually spends ten hours at work every day. She has only weekends to get
together with her family and friends. Even on weekends, she is often called into the office for
extra work.

On the other hand, Sally earns a lot of money. She has a luxury car and a wonderful house. She
doesn’t have to worry about whether she can pay her bills. She wears expensive clothes and
shops at high-end stores. She can afford to take a vacation each year. Just when she is thinking
of leaving her job and going back to her hometown to start her own business, she is offered a
new position at work. This promotion means more money, but even less time for her personal
life. Sally enjoys the money she earns and doesn’t want to give it up, but she wonders how
living in a big city and having a stressful job is impacting her life. On the other hand, she also
knows that it will be difficult to get used to living in a small town after many years in a big city.
She also knows that starting her own business will be a real challenge.

Discussion Questions:

1. What are the benefits of accepting the promotion at work?

2. What are the drawbacks of accepting the promotion at work?

3. What are the benefits of moving back to a small town and starting a business?

4. What are the drawbacks of moving back to a small town and starting a business?

5. What would you do if you were Sally? Why?

      185  
 
 Living the Simple Life

Folk music is also known as traditional music or roots music in the United States. The origin of
the term dates back to the nineteenth century, although this musical genre is a great deal older.
Traditional folk music includes the songs that ordinary people sang during
their everyday1 activities, and these are passed down through the
generations.

Today modern folk music in the United States has evolved2 into a new but
related style. It typically features the acoustic guitar (pictured), is performed
in smaller, relaxed settings, and focuses on subjects that ordinary people
can relate to. Many times the songs are concerned with the most basic and
common aspects of our lives.

“Simple Down” is an example of modern folk music in the United States. In the song, singer and
songwriter Lael Neale talks about her desire to live a simpler and more fulfilling life. She says
that “despite our lives of excess,3 we are filled with emptiness.” She realizes that many of the
belongings that she owns have not made her a happier person. As a result, she decides that
she wants to “simple down” and live a life without “trinkets”4 and “junk”. The singer has
discovered that having lots of stuff has not made her happy. Have you ever wanted to buy
something, and then realized that it didn’t make you any happier once you owned it?

Naturally, everyone has different ideas of what it means to live a simple or fulfilling life. In
“Simple Down”, the singer wants to “quit this crazy town” and move to the mountains to live
closer to nature. The singer seems to believe that she cannot live a simple life in a big city
where people are constantly busy, going places, and being encouraged to buy things. Rather,
she would prefer to live in the countryside where she can watch plants grow, wake up to the
sounds of nature, and no one can find her.

What do you think about living a simple life?

Can a person live a simple life in a big city? Can a person live a simple life in the countryside?
Is life simpler in the countryside or in the city? Why?
Is it easy to “simple down”? What could you live without? What is necessary for you to keep?

                                                                                                           
1
everyday ordinary, used in normal daily activities
2
evolve to change over time
3
excess amount that is more than needed
4
trinket small items that are not worth a lot of money and are not useful  
      186  
 
 Song 8: El Paso

ACTIVITY MENU
PRE-LISTENING

What Do You Know About…?

Picture Predictions
Unscramble the Sentences

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Listening Gap-Fill
Did You Hear What I Heard?

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

Drum and Instrument Circles
One Theme – Many Songs

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: I’d Like to Ask You About…

Reading: A Range of Questions
Writing: Songwriter Histories

      187  
 
El Paso: Lyrics
by Danielle Ate the Sandwich
(1:31)

1 Oh El Paso, I have ridden on your highway curves,

And I have spoken to the governor

About the use of your U-turns.

4 Oh El Paso, I ate two corndogs at a Wienerschnitzel,

And I have watched your infomercials

That threaten bigger muscles

To those who stay up late enough to order.

8 Oh El Paso, I left better than I was before,

And I have sung my golden melodies

With the best man that I know.

11 Oh El Paso, won't you save a place for a girl like me?

I am awful sad to leave you,

Glad to have known you,

And happy to have had your company.

      188  
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

What Do You Know About…?

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions: See page 16. Read the following True/False statements out loud to students:
El Paso is a city in Mexico.
Wienerschnitzel is a fast-food chain that specializes in hot dogs.
An infomercial is a blend of two words, “information” and “commercial,” into one new word.
To make a U-turn means to drive in a circle.

(Answer key: page 200.)

Picture Predictions

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the pictures representing El Paso (page 193) on the board.

Instructions: See page 21, Modification E.

Unscramble the Sentences

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary and grammar for the song, and
activate background knowledge about the topic
.
Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes, plus the length of the song (4:31 mins.)

Preparation and Materials: Make enough copies of the scrambled sentences (page 188) so
that each group has one sentence to unscramble. Optional: give each group a copy of the two
challenge sentences that contain relative clauses. (Answer key: see the lyrics on page 188.)

Instructions: See page 13. Do not have students re-order the sentences into a stanza after
they have unscrambled the sentences.

      189  
 
El Paso: Picture Predictions

      190  
 
El Paso: Unscramble the Sentences

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

have I on ridden curves your highway

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

spoken I about use have governor the of U-turns your to the

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

corndogs ate at Wienerschnitzel I two a

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

better I than was left I before

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

you for won’t a save me place like girl a

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

awful I to you sad leave am

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Challenge Sentences

Hint: both of these sentences contain a relative clause after the bolded noun.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
infomercials that watched have I bigger your threaten muscles

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

the my sung I melodies have golden man I best that know with

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

      191  
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song

Level: All Time: 5 – 10 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following three discussion questions on the board, or
create your own:
Does it seem like a serious or a humorous song?
What is the instrument that you hear? What does it remind you of?
Do you like the song? Why or why not?

Instructions: See page 27.

Listening Gap-Fill

Purpose: To listen for details, and practice present perfect aspect and past tense verbs

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 minutes (to play the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the gap-fill handout (page 193) for each student.
(Answer key: page 200.)

Instructions: See page 31.

Did You Hear What I Heard?

Purpose: To listen for main ideas and specific details

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song one or two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following questions on the board:

(Answer key: page 200)

1. How does the singer feel about leaving the city of El Paso?
2. What are two things that the singer did in El Paso?
3. What was the infomercial about?

Instructions: See page 34.

      192  
 
El Paso: Listening Gap-Fill

Directions: First, read through these song lyrics and guess what the missing words might be.
Write your guesses on the blanks. Second, as you listen to the song, correct what you have
written or fill in any missing words.

Oh El Paso I (1) __________________ on your highway curves, and

I (2) __________________ to the governor about the use of your U-turns.

Oh El Paso, I (3) __________________ two corndogs at a Wienerschnitzel,

and I (4) __________________ your infomercials

that threaten bigger muscles

to those who stay up late enough to order.

Oh El Paso, I (5) __________________better than I (6) __________________ before,

and I (7) __________________ my golden melodies with the best man that I know.

Oh El Paso, won’t you (8) __________________ a place for a girl like me?

I am awful sad to leave you,

glad to (9) __________________ you,

and happy to (10) __________________ your company.

      193  
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to sing the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the lyrics (page 188) on the board or on a large poster.

Instructions: See page 38.

Drum and Instrument Circles

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: All Time: 20 – 30 minutes (to sing the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Collect and bring in different types of drums or instruments. If you
cannot do this, then students can clap their hands or tap on the desks.

Instructions: See page 43.

One Theme – Many Songs

Purpose: To write creatively, and practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: 2 and above

Time: 60 – 75 minutes (depending on the number of songs to be performed, may be extended
over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Write the first two stanzas (page 188, lines 1 – 7) on the board.
Make a copy of the handout (page 198) for each group of students.

Instructions: See page 40, Modification B. Play the first two stanzas of the song several times
so that students can learn the melody of the song.

      194  
 
El Paso: One Theme – Many Songs

Directions: Write lyrics for a two-stanza song related to the theme of the song you have just
learned. Choose a topic that is related to the theme of the song. Use the same melody as the
first two stanzas of the song (lines 1 – 7). However, you should avoid using the same words that
were in the original stanza. Create seven lines using the number of syllables indicated below (to
mimic the melody of the original song).

Stanza 1

(13 syllables)

(10 syllables)

( 8 syllables)

Stanza 2

(15 syllables)

( 9 syllables)

( 7 syllables)

(11 syllables)

      195  
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: I’d Like to Ask You About…

Purpose: To ask and answer questions

Level: All Time: 40 – 50 minutes (may be split up into several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: None.

Instructions: See page 55.

Reading: A Range of Questions

Purpose: To read for factual details; combine, infer, evaluate, and reflect on information in a
reading text

Level: 2 and above Time: 25 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text and questions (pages 197-198)
for each student.

Instructions: See page 58, Modification D.

Writing: Songwriter Histories

Purpose: To write short narratives in the past tense

Level: 2 and above Time: 40 – 50 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the handout (page 199) for each group of
students.

Instructions: See page 67, Modification C.

      196  
 
 El Paso, Texas: Between Two Lands

Geography and Weather

El Paso is a city in the western corner of Texas, which lies on the
border between the United States and Mexico. It is the sixth largest
city in Texas with a metropolitan5 area that has been growing
dramatically.6 Due to its geographical characteristics, El Paso is a
place where American and Mexican cultures mix.

El Paso has a harsh desert climate. Summers are hot and dry,
while winter weather is mild with low humidity.7 Despite the dry
atmosphere, it rains about nine inches per year on average. The
city sometimes floods from late July to August, influenced by
intense summer thunderstorms.

History
Before Spanish conquistadors8 discovered this area in the Chihuahuan desert, Native
Americans inhabited the El Paso region for centuries. Although El Paso became part of the
United States when Texas joined the Union in 1845, before that there were disagreements
about how to draw the border between Mexico and the United States. The Rio Grande River
eventually became the boundary between the two
countries.

These days, El Paso has developed into a modern

city, which is a center of significant industry,
commerce,9 and transportation in the Southwest.
Major industries include tourism, textiles,
manufacturing of cement and building materials, and
food processing.

Entertainment
As a border town, El Paso has flourished with numerous entertaining and
interesting places to enjoy. Franklin Mountains State Park, which opened to
the public in 1987, is the largest urban park in the United States. The park
offers visitors various outdoor activities, such as hiking, biking, camping,
and exploring caves.

The Chamizal National Memorial, a well-known National Park,

commemorates the Chamizal Treaty of 1963. These park grounds stand for
the peaceful settlement of a 100-year border dispute10 between the United
States and Mexico. The memorial displays murals, historical documents
and pictures that present the values of diplomacy,11 different cultures, and cooperation.

 
 6    metropolitan
5
                                           a    large
               city
           plus
             the
           cities and towns surrounding it
dramatically suddenly and to a great extent
7
humidity the level of moisture in the air
8
conquistador a leader in the Spanish conquests of America in the 1500s
9
commerce activities that relate to buying and selling goods and services
10
dispute a disagreement
11
diplomacy the work of maintaining good relations between the governments of different countries

      197  
 
El Paso: A Range of Questions

Question 1: What is the weather like in El Paso? (focusing)

Question 2: What historical event makes the Chamizal National Memorial famous? Why?
(combining)

Question 3: Why do you think there were disagreements about drawing the border between
Mexico and the United States? (inferring)

Question 4: What do you think might be good about living in a big city? What would be bad
about it? Why? (evaluating)

Question 5: Please share your own travel experiences with others. How would you describe
location, weather, and history of the places you have visited? (relating)

      198  
 
El Paso: Songwriter Histories

In your group, create a sequence of pictures about the events that led up to the writing of the
song El Paso. Fill in the blank boxes below with your drawings in the order that these events
happened. Write a brief dialogue to accompany each of the drawings.

1) 2)

“ “

” ”

3) 4)

“ “

” ”

      199  
 
 El Paso: Answer Keys

What Do You Know About…?: Answer Key

1. False – it is in the state of Texas in the United States

2. True
3. True – infomercials are a type of advertisement that provides factual information about a
product.
4. False – to make a U-turn means to turn a car completely around, so that you can travel in the
opposite direction. The turn makes a U shape.

Listening Gap-Fill: Answer Key

Oh El Paso, I (1) ____have ridden___ on your highway curves,

I (2) _____ have spoken_____ to the governor about the use of your U-turns.

Oh El Paso, I (3) ____ ate_____ two corndogs at a Wienerschnitzel,

and I (4) ___ have watched______ your infomercials

that threaten bigger muscles to those who stay up late enough to order.

Oh El Paso, I (5) ___ left____ better than I (6) _____ was_____ before,

and I (7) ___ have sung_____ my golden melodies with the best man that I know.

Oh El Paso, won’t you (8) ____ save______ a place for a girl like me?

I am awful sad to leave you,

glad to (9) ____ have known____ you,

and happy to (10) ____ have had_____ your company.

Did You Hear What I Heard? Answer Key

1. The singer is sad and expresses sorrow about the things she will miss about the city of El
Paso. She also expresses gratefulness for having spent time there.

2. The singer has (1) ridden on the curving highways, (2) spoken to the state’s governor, (3)
eaten corndogs, (4) watched infomercials, (5) sung songs, and met the best man she’s ever
known.

3. The infomercial claims that ordering corndogs late enough at night gives a person larger
muscles.

      200  
 
 Song 9: Not Afraid

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

It Could Be / There Might Be

Swat
One Title, Several Words – Many Possibilities

LISTENING

Mixed-Up Lyrics
Listening Gap-Fill
Musical Words

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

The Halls Are Alive With the Sound of Singing
One Theme – Many Songs

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: Small Group Discussion and Summary

Reading: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details
Writing: Story Extensions

201  
 
Not Afraid: Lyrics
by Turning Pointe
(3:45)

1 Staring out the window, I can see the wind blow.

Watching my life go by
See I been waiting for this change
‘Cause I’ve been in this place before, I can’t stay here no more.

(Chorus 1)
5 First I must believe my future starts off with me.
Let go of the old, going for the gold, gonna reach my goal
Even if I fall, I’ll dust myself off and try again.
I’ll fly again,
I’m gonna win.

(Chorus 2)
10 Nothing’s gonna stop me,
Nothing’s gonna block me,
Nothing’s gonna break me down.
No, I’m not afraid. No, I’m not afraid.
Nothing’s gonna hold me,
You won’t control me,
Nothing’s gonna slow me down.
No, I’m not afraid. No, I’m not afraid.

18 Step up to the plate

I feel my heart racing, my stomach dropping down.
It’s either do or die, complain or try,
I’m gonna make it.
I’m going all the way.

CHORUS 1

CHORUS 2

23 Staring at my fears
Drying all my tears away
I’m not gonna be afraid [4x]

CHORUS 2

202  
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

It Could Be / There Might Be

Purpose: To generate interest. introduce a phrase from the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic
Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the picture (page 204) on the board. Cover it with five or six
strips of plain paper so that the students cannot see the picture.

Instructions: See page 20. After the entire picture is revealed, write the following lines from
the song on the board and ask students to make predictions based on the picture and the lines:
Staring out the window, I can see the wind blow
Watching my life go by

Swat

Purpose: To introduce phrases from the song, and make print and sound connections.
Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a flyswatter or rolled-up newspaper for each team. Write
the following phrases on the board in random order:
let go of the old going for the gold gonna reach my goal
dust myself off I’ll fly again I’m gonna win nothing’s gonna stop me
I’m not afraid step up to the plate it’s either do or die complain or try

Instructions: See page 11, Modification E. You can briefly explain the meaning of each of the
phrases before beginning to listen to the song:
gonna an abbreviated form of ‘going to’
going for the gold to try to win first place, to be the best
dust myself off to put a failure behind you and try again
step up to the plate in baseball, to come to bat, face the pitcher, and hit the ball
it’s either do or die it’s critical to take action or lose the opportunity

One Title, Several Words – Many Possibilities

Purpose: To predict the content of the song; to generate interest in the song; to introduce
vocabulary from the song.
Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes, plus the length of the song (3:45 mins.)

Preparation and Materials: Write the title of the song on the board.

Instructions: See page 10. After the initial round of predictions, write the following words on
the board and have students make new predictions:
life change future try fears

203  
 
Not Afraid: It Could Be / There Might Be

204  
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Mixed-Up Lyrics

Purpose: To listen for specific words or phrases, and make print and sound connections

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 25 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make copies of the handout (pages 206-207) so each group has
one set of lines. Cut the lines into strips and mix them up. Set aside one set of strips for each
group of students. (Answer key: see the song lyrics on page 202.)
Set 1: lines 1-17, 0 – 1:18
Set 2: lines 18-25, 1:18 – 2:24

Instructions: See page 27. Tell students that they have lines from one part of the song, and
those with Set 1 should begin arranging their lines from the beginning of the song. Pause the
music at the end of Set 1 (1.18 minutes into the song), and tell students with Set 2 lines to begin
arranging when you restart the music. Pause again after Set 2 (2.24 minutes into the song), and
let students relax and enjoy the rest of the song.  

Listening Gap-Fill

Purpose: To listen for details

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the gap-fill handout (page 208) for each student.
(Answer key: see the lyrics on page 202.)

Instructions: See page 31.

Musical Words

Purpose: To listen for and write specific words or phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Stop the song at the locations on the CD suggested below or
choose your own. Optional: make a copy of the lyrics (page 202) for each student or group.

Instructions: See page 32. Stop the song after each stanza (see the lyrics on page 202):
Section 1: lines 1 – 4 (0:00 – 0:26) Section 3: lines 10 – 17 (0:54 – 1:19)
Section 2: lines 5 – 9 (0:26 – 0:54) Section 4: lines 18 – 22 (1:20 – 1:34)

205  
 
Not Afraid: Mixed-Up Lyrics

Set 1 (from the beginning through 1.18 minutes)

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Staring out the window, I can see the wind blow
Watching my life go by.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
See I been waiting for this change
‘Cause I’ve been in this place before, I can’t stay here no more.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
First, I must believe my future starts off with me.
Let go of the old, going for the gold, gonna reach my goal
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Even if I fall, I’ll dust myself off and try again.
I’ll fly again,
I’m gonna win.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nothing’s gonna stop me,
Nothing’s gonna block me,
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nothing’s gonna break me down.
No, I’m not afraid. No, I’m not afraid.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nothing’s gonna hold me,
You won’t control me,
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nothing’s gonna slow me down.
No, I’m not afraid. No, I’m not afraid.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

206  
 
Set 2 (from 1.18 through 2.24 minutes)

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step up to the plate
I feel my heart racing, my stomach dropping down.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
It’s either do or die, complain or try,
I’m gonna make it.
I’m going all the way.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
First, I must believe my future starts off with me.
Let go of the old, going for the gold, gonna reach my goal
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Even if I fall, I’ll dust myself off and try again.
I’ll fly again.
I’m gonna win.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nothing’s gonna stop me,
Nothing’s gonna block me,
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nothing’s gonna break me down.
No, I’m not afraid. No, I’m not afraid.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nothing’s gonna hold me,
You won’t control me,
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nothing’s gonna slow me down.
No, I’m not afraid. No, I’m not afraid
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

207  
 
Not Afraid: Listening Gap-Fill

Directions: First, read through these song lyrics and guess what the missing words might be.
Write your guesses on the blanks. Second, as you listen to the song, correct what you have
written and fill in any missing words.

Staring out the (1) _______________, I can see the (2) _______________.
Watching my life go by,
See I been waiting for this (3) _______________,
‘Cause I’ve been in this place before, I can’t (4) _______________ here no more.

(Chorus 1)
First, I must (5) _______________ my future starts off with me.
(6) _______________ of the old, going for the gold, gonna reach my goal
Even if I (7) _______________, I’ll dust myself off and (8) _______________.
I’ll fly again, I’m gonna win.

(Chorus 2)
Nothing’s gonna (9) _______________ me,
Nothing’s gonna (10) _______________ me,
Nothing’s gonna (11) _______________ me down.
No, I’m not (12) _______________. No, I’m not (13) _______________.
Nothing’s gonna (14) _______________me,
You won’t (15) _______________me,
Nothing’s gonna (16) _______________me down.
No, I’m not afraid. No, I’m not afraid.

Step up to the plate

I feel my (17) _______________racing, my stomach dropping down.
It’s either do or die, (18) _______________or try,
I’m gonna make it.
I’m going all the way.

CHORUS 1

CHORUS 2

Staring at my (19) _______________,

Drying all my (20) _______________ away,
I’m not gonna be afraid. [4x]

CHORUS 2

208  
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to sing the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the lyrics for Chorus 1 and Chorus 2 (page 202, lines 5 – 9
and 10 – 17) on the board in two different spots.

Instructions: See page 38, Modification D. Divide the class into two groups. Group 1 sings
along with Chorus 1 each time it is heard in the song, and Group 2 sings along with Chorus 2.

The Halls Are Alive With the Sound of Singing

Purpose: To write and perform dramatic dialogue

Level: 3 and above Time: 50 – 70 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (page 202) for each group of students,
or write the lyrics on the board.

Instructions: See page 47.

One Theme – Many Songs

Purpose: To create a song, and practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: 3 and above

Time: 60 – 75 minutes (depending on the number of songs to be performed, this activity may
be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions: See page 40.

209  
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: Small Group Discussion and Summary

Purpose: To think critically and express opinions

Level: 3 and above Time: 25 – 35 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following discussion questions on the board:
1. What is one of your goals in life?
2. What is the biggest change you have had to make in your life so far?
3. What do you think makes a person ready to face their fears?
4. What was the most difficult decision you had to make in your life?
5. What were the consequences of that decision?

Instructions: See page 53.

Reading: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details

Purpose: To write and answer questions that focus on main ideas and details

Level: 3 and above

Time: 30 – 40 minutes in class (part of this activity is assigned as homework)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text (page 211) for each student. As
homework, assign each student to read the text and write either one main idea question or one
detail question.

Instructions: See page 59.

Writing: Story Extensions

Purpose: To write creative narratives

Level: 2 and above Time: 45 – 55 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (page 202) or write them on the board.

Instructions: See page 70.

210  
 
 Going for the Gold

“…I must believe my future starts off with me.”

Not Afraid, by Turning Pointe

In the song Not Afraid, the group Turning Pointe sings about an important idea for young
Americans: that they have the power and responsibility to choose their
own future to succeed in life. This pop gospel group sings about how
important it is for a young person to face the future with
determination12 rather than fear. The lyrics are about making goals for
the future and achieving them no matter what obstacles13 come along.

Three expressions in the song show the singers’ determination to face

the future and achieve goals. Each one has its roots in American
culture. What do you think they mean?

go for the gold step up to the plate do or die

Now, look at the following possible interpretations.14 Do they match your ideas?

Go for the gold This expression means to make an effort to be the best.
“Gold” refers to the gold medal that athletes receive when they win first place in
a sport at the Olympics. However, “gold” can also be used as a metaphor15 for
success in all aspects of life. In this song, “go for the gold” has the more general
meaning of trying to be the best rather than the specific meaning of winning an
athletic contest.

Step up to the plate This expression comes from the sport of baseball.
When players take a turn at bat, they stand beside the “home plate,” which is
marked on the ground. They must face the pitcher, who throws the ball very
hard and fast. The singers use this expression to say that they are facing
challenges in life.

Do or die This expression means that a person must either do

something immediately or lose the opportunity. The lyrics in the song say “It’s
either do or die.” If the singers choose to “do something,” the opportunity will
not be lost. You may have heard the similar phrase “it’s now or never”.
 

                                                                                                           
12
determination a quality that makes you continue trying to do or achieve something that is difficult
13
obstacle an object that you have to go around or over; something that blocks your path
14
interpretation the way that something is explained or understood
15
metaphor a word or phrase for one thing used to refer to another thing to show or suggest that they are similar  

211  
 
 Song 10: Can’t Stop

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

Picture Predictions
Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary
It Could Be / There Might Be

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Find the Mistakes
Song Bingo

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

Drum and Instrument Circles
Your Moves

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: Act the Part

Reading: Reading Groups
Writing: Guest Musicians / Speakers

212
 
Can’t Stop: Lyrics
by Ozomatli
(2:58)

(Bom, bom, bom, ba-ba-ba-va-yom bom-bom-ba-yoh... 3x)

1 So you feel you can't go on
(that) you got nothin' left to lose
(that) there is no one left to love
(that) you got nothin' left to choose
(you can’t stop)

6 Can't live for yesterday

‘Cause we gotta move on in a different way
Today is another day
Can't stop now today is another day

(Chorus)
10 Can't stop this love, (shake it, shake it, shake-shake it, shake it)
(we're movin')
Can't stop this love
Can’t stop now
(we got to keep movin')
we got faith in what love can do
(shake it, shake it, shake-shake it, shake it, we’re movin’)- don't look back we're gonna
make it through
(can't stop now, we got to keep movin')

18 You feel you got nowhere to run

‘Cause there is nothing we can't do
You have so much left to love
In the end there's always me and you...

21 (can’t stop) Can't live for yesterday

‘Cause we gotta move on in a different way (can’t stop)
Today is another day
Can't stop now today is another day

CHORUS

213
 
25 (shake it, shake it, shake it, shake it) Come on!

26 Front back middle to top we keep it groovin'

(shake it shake it, shake it shake it) no more sad songs singing the blues we keep it
moving
(you can’t stop)

29 Can’t live for yesterday

‘Cause we gotta move on in a different way
No more sad songs singing the blues we keep it moving
(move….)

33 You know we don't stop, even when the wheels lock

and when the beat knocks
people in the street rock
(can’t stop now, we got to keep moving)

37 You know we don't stop, even when the wheels lock

and when the beat knocks
people in the street rock
(can’t stop now, we got to keep moving)

41 we got faith in what love can do

(shake it, shake it, shake-shake it, shake it, we’re movin’)- don't look back we're gonna
make it through
(can't stop now, we got to keep movin')

44 we got faith in what love can do

(shake it, shake it, shake-shake it, shake it, we’re movin’)- don't look back we're gonna
make it through
(can't stop now, we got to keep movin')

47 (Bom, bom, bom, ba-ba-ba-va-yom

Can’t stop now.

214
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Picture Predictions

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the picture (page 216) on the board. (Make sure students
cannot see the title of the song.)

Instructions: See page 18, Modification A.

Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following three words/phrases related to the theme of
the song on separate pieces of paper as the starting point for brainstorming:
determination move on to believe in something

Instructions: See page 17, Modification A. Divide students into three groups and give each
group one of the papers to start with.

It Could Be / There Might Be

Purpose: To generate interest in the song, activate background knowledge about the topic,
and introduce a line from the song

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the picture of the surfer (page 217) on the board. Cover it
with five or six strips of plain paper so that students cannot see the picture. Optional: Read
about Bethany Hamilton in the reading text on pages 223-224, and share information about her
with the students after the picture is revealed.

Instructions: See page 20. After the entire picture is revealed, write the following lines from
the song on the board and have students make predictions based on the picture and the lines:
Can’t stop now, we got to keep moving.

215
 
Can’t Stop: Picture Predictions

216
 
Can’t Stop: It Could Be / There Might Be

Bethany Hamilton, American Surfer

217
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song

Level: All Time: 10 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following three discussion questions on the board, or
create your own:
Does it seem like a happy or a sad song? Why?
Does the song remind you of any other songs you know?
Do you like the song? Why or why not?

Instructions: See page 27.

Find the Mistakes

Purpose: To listen for details and for specific words or phrases

Level: 2 and above

Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to play the first part of the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Find the Mistakes handout (page 219) for
each group of students. (Answer key: page 225.)

Instructions: See page 34. Play the first part of the song (lines 1-9, 0:00 – 0:45).

Song Bingo

Purpose: To listen for specific words, introduce vocabulary from the song, and make print and
sound connections

Level: All Time: 10 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following words from the song on the board in random
order:
feel lose love choose move today stop faith look keep
nowhere run always yesterday different back middle top
sad song wheels lock knocks beat street rock

Instructions: See page 33.

218
 
Can’t Stop: Find the Mistakes

Directions: As you listen to the first 45 seconds of the song, read the lyrics below. Find and
correct all of the mistakes in the lyrics.

(Bom, bom, bom, ba-ba-ba-va-yom bom-bom-ba-yoh... 3x)

1 So you felt you can't go on

(that) you got nothin' left to love

(that) there is someone left to lose

(that) you got nothin' left to choose

(we can’t stop)

6 Don't live for yesterday

‘Cause we gotta go on in a different way

Today was a new day

Can't quit now tomorrow today is another day

219
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to sing the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the lyrics (pages 213-214) on the board in two places or on
two large posters.

Instructions: See page 38, Modification B. Have two people ready to lead the song by pointing
to the words on the board. Each person will lead one group. Divide students into two groups.
Have Group 1 sing all of the regular lines, and Group 2 sing all of the words/lines that are in
parentheses. For example line 10:
Group 1 sings: Can’t stop this love
Group 2 sings: (shake it, shake it, shake-shake it, shake it)

Drum and Instrument Circles

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: All Time: 20 – 30 minutes (to sing through the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Collect and bring in different types of drums or instruments. If you
cannot do this, then students can clap their hands or tap on the desks.

Instructions: See page 43.

Your Moves

Purpose: To learn vocabulary from the song, and represent word meanings with actions

Level: All Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (pages 213-214) for each student, or
write them on the board. Circle the following words and phrases each time they appear in the
lyrics: can’t stop move on shake it keep movin’ / moving love look back

Instructions: See page 42.

220
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: Act the Part

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation, and use critical thinking skills to resolve a
problem

Level: 3 and above Time: 25 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the role-play cards (page 222) for each group of
students. Use the following scenario:
One of you who dreams of becoming the lead singer of a rock band, keeps
encountering challenges that prevent him/her from reaching success. The rest
of you will use lines from the song ‘Can’t Stop’ to convince him/her not to give
up the dream.

Instructions: See page 52, Modification B. Divide the students into groups of three.

Reading: Reading Groups

Purpose: To practice reading comprehension skills, conduct research, think critically, and
collaborate as part of a team

Level: 3 and above

Time: 60 – 75 minutes (10 – 25 minutes for groups to prepare their paragraphs, plus 50
minutes to go through the text as a class)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text (pages 223-224) for each student.

Instructions: See page 64, Modification A. Divide students into four groups and assign each
group the following paragraphs.
Group 1: paragraph 1 Group 3: paragraph 4
Group 2: paragraphs 2 – 3 Group 4: paragraph 5

Writing: Guest Musicians / Speakers

Purpose: To generate interest in inspirational leaders, and write invitations

Level: Level 3 and above Time: 40 – 50 minutes

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions: See page 71, Modification A. Have students write a mock invitation to someone
who has overcome adversity to succeed. The person could be a local member of the
community, a famous world leader, or a celebrity.

221
 
Can’t Stop: Act the Part

Rockstar Dreamer
Ever since you were a child, you dreamed of becoming the lead singer of a rock band. You have
started a band, but you have nowhere to practice because the neighbors keep complaining to
the police about the noise. Because the band hasn’t been able to practice, you are not very
good and cannot get anyone to hire your band. Now, one band member is threatening to quit,
and your parents are pushing you to get a full-time job. Although you are good at writing (you
write songs, after all!), you do not want to work in an office. But you are about ready to give up
your dream of singing and find a job.

Try to use the following lines in the role-play:

I feel I can’t go on There are no more options – nothing left to choose
There’s nowhere to run I feel there’s no other choice

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Successful Rockstar
You are the drummer for a successful rock band, The Flying Umbrellas. It took your band ten
years of hard work to become famous, so you know how Rockstar Dreamer feels, and you don’t
think he/she should give up the dream. You wish you could help but don’t know what you can
do. You try to encourage Rockstar Dreamer either to keep the band together or to find a new
band to sing with. You try to remind Rockstar Dreamer that he/she must have faith in his/her
dreams.

Try to use the following lines in the role-play:

Have faith in what love can do No more singing the blues
We can’t stop this love You can’t stop

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Best Friend
You are Rockstar Dreamer’s best friend. At first you think Rockstar Dreamer should give up the
band and come to work with you at your newspaper. You know that Rockstar Dreamer is a good
writer and believe that he/she needs a fresh start. But as you listen to Rockstar Dreamer and
Successful Rockstar, you begin to change your mind. You offer to be Rockstar Dreamer’s band
manager to help him/her find places for the band to play. And, you have a hidden talent – you
are a great guitar player!

Try to use the following lines in the role-play:

Today is another day There is nothing we can’t do
We’re gonna make it through We have to move on in a different way

222
 
 Achieving Dreams: Overcoming Obstacles

The song Can’t Stop by Ozomatli mixes several genres of contemporary American music,
including rock and Latin-inspired salsa.1 This combination results in a powerful and catchy
rhythm that makes listeners want to sing and move along with the music. It is just the type of
music that athletes might listen to while working out.2 Many athletes believe that listening to
music while exercising helps them exercise longer and harder as they match their movements
to the beat. Some people claim that listening to music while exercising can be motivating, by
giving them something enjoyable to think about and distracting them from their exertion.3

It’s not just the beat of the music that many athletes enjoy, however. It’s also possible that the
message of a song motivates people. Can’t Stop certainly fills the bill.4 In the song, Ozomatli
encourages listeners to keep moving forward even when it seems like they can’t go on, when
they have lost everything, or when it seems that they have no options. The band reminds
listeners that “today is another day” – each day is a fresh start, and love and faith in our dreams
can keep us moving forward.

Here are the stories of two famous Americans who refused to stop pursuing their dreams,
regardless of the obstacles that they faced. Their great expectations pushed them to overcome
adversity,5 to have faith in their dreams, and to keep moving forward.

Christopher Reeve was born on September 25, 1952, in New York City. At
age 26, he played the leading role in the movie, Superman, and has been
known as the fictional superhero since then. Reeve became known as a
symbol of strength and heroism. At age 42, during a horseback riding event,
Reeve fell from his horse and broke two bones in his back (vertebrae),
leaving him permanently paralyzed below the neck. Many believed the
accident would end his acting career, but Reeve didn’t give up his love of
acting. Three years after the injury, he produced and starred in a TV movie,
Rear Window, and won a prestigious award for his performance. In Christopher Reeve
addition to his continued passion for acting, Reeve started several foundations to advance
research on spinal cord6 injuries and improve the quality of life for people with this type of
injury. His perseverance after his injury brought a great deal of attention and financial support to
this issue, and he remained actively engaged in these endeavors until his death in 2004.

Bethany Hamilton was born on February 8, 1990, in Kauai, Hawaii. She

entered (and won!) her first surfing competition at age eight and dreamed
of becoming a professional surfer. But in October 2003, this dream was
threatened. Hamilton was attacked by a shark while surfing and lost her
left arm. Although many might have been afraid to get back in the water,
Hamilton was determined to return to competitive surfing and was surfing
again within a month of the shark attack! One year later, Hamilton had
won first place at a major competition and has become a professional

                                                                                                           
1
salsa a type of music that is good for dancing Bethany Hamilton
2
working out exercising
3
exertion physical or mental effort
4
fill the bill to satisfy or fulfill; to be what is needed
5
adversity a problem or difficult challenge  
6
spinal cord the large group of nerves which runs through the center of the spine and carries messages
between the brain and the rest of the body

223
 
surfer. She wrote about her experiences in an autobiography, which was later made into a
movie called Soul Surfer. Her story has been an inspiration to many, and a lesson in pursuing
your dreams regardless of the challenges that life throws at you.

224
 
 Can’t Stop: Answer Keys

Find the Mistakes: Answer Key

(Bom, bom, bom, ba-ba-ba-va-yom bom-bom-ba-yoh... 3x)

1 So you felt feel you can't go on
(that) you got nothin' left to love lose
(that) there is someone no one left to lose love
(that) you got nothin' left to choose
(we you can’t stop)

6 Don't Can’t live for yesterday

‘Cause we gotta go move on in a different way
Today was is a new another day
Can't quit stop now tomorrow today is another day

225
 
Song 11: Into the Garden

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

Swat
Unscramble the Sentences
Can You See What I See?

LISTENING

Dictation
Did You Hear What I Heard?
Mixed-Up Pictures

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

Old Song, New Song
Your Moves

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: I’d Like to Ask You About…

Reading: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details
Writing: Paragraph Posters

226
Into the Garden: Lyrics
by Zach Ladin
(4:56)

(1... 2… 1-2-3… Giddy up!)

1 Let’s go out to the field

Sunflowers dancin’ in the breeze
Breathe that cool air in off the morning
Let’s get down on our knees
…. And pull some weeds!
Yeah, come on, let’s pull those weeds! Yeah.
I’m pullin’ some weeds. Come on now!
Pull those weeds. Give these plants some room to breathe. Yeah!
We’re pullin’ weeds, good job.

10 Let’s go out to the field!

Let’s go have some fun!
We’ll help these plants grow in water and love.
Long rows in the sun.
Let’s go into the garden.
There’s so much to see.
Can you smell the tomatoes?
It’s just like heaven to me.
It smells just like heaven to me.

19 Let’s go into the field.

Life’s all around.
Plants, insects, spiders, birds, mammals, and more
In the sky above and the soil underground.

20 Let’s go into the garden.

It’s so amazing to me.
With our help these plants will grow strong
And give us food to eat,
And give us a nice tasty treat.

25 Let’s go into the field.

Nibble on the fruits you can find.
Let’s give thanks while we’re harvesting.
That sun feels divine!
What do you want to grab from the garden? [x4]

30 All right, now we’re gonna need all of your help!

So who’s ready? Who’s comin’ with me?
We’re gonna go out to the garden,
And we’re gonna harvest whatever we want!
You ready? Come on, let’s go!

35 Who likes asparagus?

227
 Some beautiful broccoli [oooo!]
37 Some crispy carrots
How ‘bout some dandelion greens?
How ‘bout some eggplant?
Some fabulous fennel?
I’d love some garlic. [Yes, please!]
Some happy horseradish
Incredible iceberg
Who wants some jalapenos? [Woo!]
45 Who wants some kale?
Who wants some luscious leeks? [Oh, I’d love some.]
Some mighty mushrooms
Some napa cabbage
Odiferous onions [These smell good!]
Purple potatoes [Wow!]
Some cucumbers!
How ‘bout a rutabaga? [Yeah!]
Some super squash
Some tomatoes [They smell good, too!]
55 How ‘bout some urad beans?
Vivacious veggies [Yeah!]
Wonderful watermelon [Woah!]
We better get extra!
Some yummy yarrow
Zany zucchini
Great job everyone!

62 What do you want to grab from the garden?[x4]

For dinner’s giant salad
…. and soup!
Who wants some soup?
Who wants a nice hot bowl of vegetable stew?
Ohhh, it smells good!
Who wants a nice fresh green crispy organic salad? [Yes, please!]
Let’s go into the garden.
70 Feel the warm sunlight.
Let’s enjoy and be thankful.
All that the Earth provides
For all that the Earth provides
The Earth provides. [x4] [Earth provides.]
Thank you, Earth, for what you provide. [x9] [In the garden… x4]
Thank you, Earth!

228
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Swat

Purpose: To introduce the names of vegetables and adjectives used in the song, and make
print and sound connections

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a flyswatter or rolled-up newspaper for each team. Hang
the pictures (pages 230-245) for the following words/phrases on the board in random order:
tomatoes asparagus beautiful broccoli crispy carrots
dandelion greens eggplant fabulous fennel incredible iceberg (lettuce
luscious leeks mighty mushrooms napa cabbage odiferous onions
purple potatoes super squash wonderful watermelon zany zucchini

Instructions: See page 11, Modification B.

Unscramble the Sentences

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, write phrases and
sentences, and form commands / phrases suggesting “let’s go…”

Level: 2 and above Time: 25 – 35 minutes, plus the length of the song (4:56 minutes)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Scrambled Sentences handout (page 246)
containing sentences beginning with “Let’s go” for each group of students. (Answer key: page
253.)

Instructions: See page 16, Modification A. First, review how to form the phrase “let’s go” using
the imperative base form of the verb and no subject. For example:
Let’s go out to the field.
Breathe that cool air in off the morning.

Can You See What I See?

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 25 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the picture of the garden (page 247) on the board.

Instructions: See page 19.

229
Into the Garden: Sway and Mixed-Up Pictures

tomatoes

230
asparagus

231
beautiful broccoli
232
crispy carrots

233
dandelion greens
234
eggplant
235
fabulous fennel

236
incredible iceberg
(lettuce)
237
luscious leeks

238
mighty mushrooms

239
napa cabbage

240
odiferous onions
241
purple potatoes

242
super squash
243
 wonderful
watermelon
244
zany zucchini

245
 Into the Garden: Unscramble the Sentences

Directions: Each sentence below has been scrambled so that the words are mixed up. For each
sentence, put the words in the correct order to form grammatical and sensible sentences.

1. go out the let’s to field

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

2. that cool in breathe morning air the off

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

3. let’s knees get on our down

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

4. pull let’s weeds those

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

5. plants breathe some give room to these

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

6. let’s some go fun have

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

7. garden into go the let’s

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

8. thanks harvesting let’s while we’re give

Unscrambled sentence: _______________________________________________________

246
Into the Garden: Can You See What I See?

247
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to sing the song one or two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the first half of the lyrics (pages 227-228, lines 1 – 29) on
the board or on a large poster.

Instructions: See page 38, Modification C. Students sing along with the first half of the song,
and then clap or tap their desks to the beat for the remainder of the song.

Old Song, New Song

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: 2 and above Time: 40 – 55 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the first half of the lyrics (page 227, lines 1 – 29)
for each group of students, or write the lyrics on the board.

Instructions: See page 39, Modification C. Use the first half of the song (lines 1 – 29).

Your Moves

Purpose: To learn vocabulary from the song, and represent word meanings with actions

Level: All Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the first half of the lyrics (page 227, lines 1 – 31)
and circle the following words or phrases each time they appear. Make a copy of the handout
for each group of students:
Let’s go breathe that cool air get down on our knees come on
pull those weeds/pullin’ weeds can you smell grow strong
nibble on the fruits give thanks we’re harvesting grab from the garden

Instructions: See page 42. Sing and move along with the first half of the song (lines 1 – 31).

249
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to sing the song one or two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the first half of the lyrics (pages 227-228, lines 1 – 29) on
the board or on a large poster.

Instructions: See page 38, Modification C. Students sing along with the first half of the song,
and then clap or tap their desks to the beat for the remainder of the song.

Old Song, New Song

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: 2 and above Time: 40 – 55 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the first half of the lyrics (page 227, lines 1 – 29)
for each group of students, or write the lyrics on the board.

Instructions: See page 39, Modification C. Use the first half of the song (lines 1 – 29).

Your Moves

Purpose: To learn vocabulary from the song, and represent word meanings with actions

Level: All Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the first half of the lyrics (page 227, lines 1 – 31)
and circle the following words or phrases each time they appear. Make a copy of the handout
for each group of students:
Let’s go breathe that cool air get down on our knees come on
pull those weeds/pullin’ weeds can you smell grow strong
nibble on the fruits give thanks we’re harvesting grab from the garden

Instructions: See page 42. Sing and move along with the first half of the song (lines 1 – 31).

249
Post-Listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: I’d Like to Ask You About…

Purpose: To ask and answer questions

Level: All Time: 40 – 50 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: None.

Instructions: See page 55. Students are going to interview and describe a person who has a
large garden.

Reading: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details

Purpose: To write and answer questions that focus on main ideas and details

Level: 3 and above Time: 30 – 40 minutes in class (part of this activity is homework)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text (pages 251-252) for each student.
As homework, assign each student to read the text and write either one main idea question or
one detail question.

Instructions: See page 59.

Writing: Paragraph Posters

Purpose: To write cohesive paragraphs, and represent ideas visually

Level: 2 and above Time: 100 – 130 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a persuasive paragraph as a model for students.

(Optional) Gather crayons or markers, old magazines, glue, and poster paper.

Instructions: See page 69. Tell students to write a persuasive paragraph on the following
topic: Reasons for growing your own food

250
 Gardens for All

Have you ever planted, grown, and harvested7 your own fruits or vegetables? Doing so is just
what Zach Ladin happily sings about. Into the Garden encourages listeners to go out into the
garden, pull weeds,8 and enjoy the sunshine, soil, and sounds of nature. Ladin expresses
excitement about the variety of food that comes from the garden. He names a lot of different
vegetables, including broccoli, carrots, potatoes, tomatoes, and cabbage.

In the past, many Americans lived in rural9 areas or

on farms and grew most of their own food. With the
changing economy of the twentieth century,
however, Americans have moved away from rural
areas to work in cities, where they shop for food at
the supermarket or neighborhood grocery store
rather than growing it themselves. In the past few
years, many food shoppers have been rethinking
where their food comes from. They think about how
our shopping and eating habits impact the
environment and our health. Today many
Americans value being close to nature, and they
want to participate in growing the food that they eat.

Some are concerned about the quality of the fresh food that they find at the grocery store and
particularly about the way that it is grown. They are worried about the long shipping routes from
the field to the store as well as the chemicals that are used on the plants.

One way that people are finding better and fresher food is by going to farmers’ markets. A
farmer’s market is an outdoor market where farmers and small businesses can sell their
products directly to the public (rather than through a store). Many farmers’ markets sell organic
food—in other words, food that has been grown without the use of chemicals. The food comes
from farmers in the community or nearby areas to avoid the
long shipping process and the use of chemicals to keep food
fresh. For example, a farmers’ market in Michigan sells
Michigan tomatoes when they are ready in July through
September. On the other hand, a Michigan grocery store may
sell tomatoes all year round from far-away California, Florida,
or Mexico. These tomatoes may have been grown in
greenhouses10 or with the help of chemicals to produce them
in the winter and then preserve them for their long journey
across the country.

A second way that Americans are showing interest in gardening would make Zach Ladin smile.
They are finding a patch of land and planting their own gardens. Some people grow their fruits
and vegetables in their backyard by digging up an area that may have contained flowers or
grass. They put up a fence to keep out the rabbits and other animals. They spend their evenings
and weekends on their knees pulling weeds. Eventually, they enjoy home-grown food.

                                                                                                           
7
harvest to gather crops from the field
8
weed a plant that grows very quickly where it is not wanted and covers or kills more desirable plants
9
rural belonging to the countryside
10
greenhouse a building or part of a building that has glass walls and a glass roof and is used for growing plants

251
But not all Americans have a yard where they can plant gardens.
In many urban areas, people live in apartment buildings. In big
cities, people may plant herbs and small vegetables in pots, which
they place on windowsills, balconies11 or rooftops where the sun
can shine on them.

Another option for some city gardeners is the community garden.

A community garden is owned and cared for by a group of people.
Each person goes to a central location where public land has
been set aside for residents to grow food. Neighbors work
together to plant, care for, and harvest the fruit and vegetables.
Co-ops, home gardens, rooftop gardens, and community gardens
show that today many Americans share Zach Ladin’s excitement
for gardening and eating fresh, locally grown food.

                                                                                                           
11
balcony a raised platform that is connected to the side of a building above the ground and is surrounded by a low
wall or railing

252
 Into the Garden: Answer Keys

Unscramble the Sentences: Answer Key

1. Let’s go out to the field

2. Breathe that cool air in off the morning
3. Let’s get down on our knees
4. Let’s pull those weeds
5. Give these plants some room to breathe.
6. Let’s go have some fun
7. Let’s go into the garden
8. Let’s give thanks while we’re harvesting

Mixed-Up Pictures: Answer Key

1. asparagus
2. beautiful broccoli
3. crispy carrots
4. dandelion greens
5. eggplant
6. fabulous fennel
7. incredible iceberg (lettuce)
8. luscious leeks
9. mighty mushrooms
10. napa cabbage
11. odiferous onions
12. purple potatoes
13. super squash
14. tomatoes
15. wonderful watermelon
16. zany zucchini

Did You Hear What I Heard: Answer Key

1. water, care, sunshine, good soil, pulling weeds, fertilizer, mulch

2. sunflowers, breathing cool air, pulling weeds, smelling tomatoes, having fun, seeing life all
around; nice tasty treats

3. touch: pulling weeds, sunlight; sight: sunflowers, life all around; smell: breathing cool air,
smelling tomatoes; taste: tasty treats, nibble on fruits.
 

253
 Song 12: Hey, Little Minivan

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

Swat
Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary
Four Corners

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Listening for Rhyming Words
Mixed-Up Pictures

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

Show Me the Word
Crazy Lyrics

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: What Do YOU Think?

Reading: Jigsaw Reading
Writing: Story Extensions

      254
 
Hey, Little Minivan: Lyrics
by Austin Lounge Lizards
(3:44)

1 On Deadman's Curve I used to shut 'em down.

I had the hottest muscle car in my hometown.
I could burn rubber in all four gears.
But I haven't done that in a million years.

5 Hey, little minivan, we're goin' to the grocery store.

6 She's got an automatic tranny with overdrive,

And the radio's tuned to Magic 95.
She gets 30 miles on a gallon of gas,
And I can schlep all the girls to gymnastics class.
Her headlights on both night and day,
The most practical value in the USA.
She's got cruise control, ABS, and EFI,
I keep her Michelins at 32 PSI.

14 Hey, little minivan, we're goin' to the children's museum.

15 On icy mornings when I'm feeling my age,

I'm protected and warm in my steel cage.
Her climate control really pumps out the heat,
And her dual air bags just can't be beat.
She's rated real high by Consumer Reports,
And her two front seats have got lumbar support.
I've got the good driver rate and comprehensive insurance,
And she's loaded with electronic theft deterrents.
Step away from the car, step away from the car.
Step away from the car.

25 We're a wild and rowdy bunch when you pass us by,

Bobby's buggin' baby sister and makin' her cry.
If I have to pull over someone's gonna pay,
      255
 
28 And it was fun, fun, fun, till Bobby took her teether away.
(Fun, fun, fun, fun)

30 Hey, little minivan, we're goin' to the pediatrician.

31 Now the wife and I hardly ever date,

'Cause the babysitter has to be home by 8.
We hurry through dinner and go out and park
With the fold-down seats we can nap till dark.
I dream of Barracudas and souped-up 'Vettes,
Crazy games of chicken, and drag race bets.
Then she wakes me up and says, “Honey, don't be sad.
Our van's the classic Woody you never had!”

39 Now if I ever get tired of my minivan,

A red sports car will make me young again.

41 Hey, little minivan, we're goin' to the grocery store.

We’ll get there when we get there.
Hey, little minivan, we're goin' to the grocery store.
(Why didn’t you think of that before we left?)
Hey, little minivan, we're goin' to the grocery store.

46 (I don’t care who hit who first – just stop it!)

Hey, little minivan, we're goin' to the grocery store.
(Don’t make me come back there.)
(If Larry jumped off a cliff, would you do that, too?
(What did you do with the last one I gave you?)
(Three kids! What were we thinking?)

      256
 
 Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Swat

Purpose: To introduce vocabulary from the song, and make print and sound connections

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a flyswatter or rolled-up newspaper for each team. Hang
the pictures (pages 258-262) for the following words on the board in random order:
steering wheel cruise control headlights seat belts tire mirror
speedometer seats climate control automatic tranny (transmission)

Instructions: See page 11, Modification B.

Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the picture of a minivan (page 263) on the board as the
starting point for brainstorming.

Instructions: See page 17, Modification D.

Four Corners

Purpose: To generate interest in the song, express opinions, and make choices about
controversial ideas/statements

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the pictures of four types of vehicles (pages 264-267) in four
corners or areas of the classroom and label them A, B, C, and D.

Instructions: See page 9, Modification C. Write the following questions on the board one at a
time, and tell students to select their answers by standing beside one of the vehicle pictures:
1. Which type of car is best for a family of five?
2. Which type of car is best for the environment?
3. Which type of car is the most fun to drive?
4. Which type of car is the most practical?
5. Which type of car is the most reliable?

      257
 
Hey, Little Minivan: Swat

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

      258
 
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

      259
 
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

      260
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

      261
 
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

      262
 
Hey, Little Minivan: Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary

minivan

      263
 
Hey, Little Minivan: Four Corners

pick-up truck

      264
 
 minivan

      265
 
 hybrid car

      266
 
 sports car

      267
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following three discussion questions on the board, or
create your own:
What does the person singing the song tell us about himself?
Is this person happy or sad? Why?
Does it seem to be a serious or a humorous song?

Instructions: See page 27.

Listening for Rhyming Words

Purpose: To listen for details, and recognize and discriminate between similar sounds

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (pages 255-256) for each student or pair
of students. (Answer key: page 277.)

Instructions: See page 30, Modification C. Tell students to find all the rhyming words at the
end of each line.

Mixed-Up Pictures

Purpose: To listen for specific words or ideas

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the pictures of car parts (page 269) for each group
of students, and cut the pictures apart. (Answer key: page 277.)

Instructions: See page 28, Modification A.

      268
 
Hey, Little Minivan: Mixed-Up Pictures

A. sports car B. radio

-------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------

C. airbags D. automatic tranny

-------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------

E. seats F. minivan
-------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------

G. headlights H. climate control

-------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------

I. gas J. burn rubber

      269
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to sing the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the lyrics (pages 255-256) on the board or on a large poster.

Instructions: See page 38, Modification C. Play the song and point to the lyrics as you hear
them. Ask students to sing along only to the line below each time it occurs in the song:
Hey, little minivan, we’re goin’ to the ______ (in Lines 5, 14, 30, 41, 43, 45)

Show Me the Word

Purpose: To make print and sound connections, and learn vocabulary from the song

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare pieces of paper or cards for students to write on. Put the
following words on the board in random order:
car minivan radio gas headlights air bags seats driver
pull over pediatrician wife grocery store hometown cruise control rubber
gears overdrive night day mornings

Instructions: See page 41.

Crazy Lyrics

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words, use different parts of speech, and think about why
words are appropriate or inappropriate in particular contexts

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Crazy Lyrics handout (page 271) for each
group of students.

Instructions: See page 46.

      270
 
Hey, Little Minivan: Crazy Lyrics

Directions to Group Recorder: Do not show this handout to the rest of your group. You are going
to ask your group members to give you a word that fits the description in parentheses
underneath each line. Write down the word that your group members suggest. For example, if
you say, “Give me an adjective,” and your group members say, “heavy,” then write “heavy” in
the first blank. When you have filled in all the blanks, read or sing the new song to your group.

On Deadman's Curve I used to ____________________ ‘em down.

(action verb)

I had the hottest ____________________ in my hometown.

(noun - thing)

I could _________________ ________________ in all four ____________________,

(action verb) (noun - thing) (plural noun - thing)

But I haven't done that in a million years.

Hey, ____________________ minivan, we're going to the ____________________.

(adjective) (noun - place)

She's got an automatic ____________________ with overdrive,

(noun - thing)

And the radio's tuned to Magic 95.

She gets 30 miles on a ____________________ of gas,

(noun - quantity)

And I can ____________________ all the girls to ____________________.

(verb - transportation) (noun – place)

Her ___________________________ on both night and day,

(plural noun – part of car)

The most ____________________ value in the USA.

(adjective)

She's got cruise control, ABS, and EFI. I keep her Michelins at 32 PSI.

Hey, ____________________minivan, we're goin' to the ____________________.

(adjective) (noun - place)

      271
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: What Do YOU Think?

Purpose: To ask and answer questions, and summarize and present information

Level: 3 and above Time: 40 – 50 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Pre-teach the concept of surveys and their results: the purpose of
a survey, types of questions, how to calculate and present results.

Instructions: See page 50. Possible survey topics include:

1. Types of transportation typically used for getting to and from school each day
2. Types of vehicles typically owned by students’ families
3. The benefits of different types of transportation

Reading: Jigsaw Reading

Purpose: To summarize information presented in texts, speak and listen in order to present
information, practice note-taking, and collaborating as part of a team

Level: 2 and above Time: 50 – 60 minutes

Preparation and Materials: See page 276. Make a copy of the note-taking form (page 276) for
each student. Divide the number of students by six and make that many copies of the
paragraphs (pages 273-274).

Instructions: See page 60, Modification A. Divide students into six groups. Tell the students
that a family of four needs to buy a car. Get each group to suggest which car the family should
buy and why.

Writing: Story Extensions

Purpose: To write creative narratives

Level: 2 and above Time: 45 – 50 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (pages 255-256) for each group of
students, or write them on the board.

Instructions: See page 70.

      272
 
Hey, Little Minivan: Jigsaw Reading

Sports Cars Label: _____

These flashy cars are built for speed! They typically

have powerful engines, sit close to the ground, and often
have firm suspension1 and rear-wheel drive.2 These
characteristics result in a car that’s great for short,
casual trips with one of your favorite companions – but
probably no one else. The backseat (if there is one) is
small and accessible only through the two front doors;
the trunk is typically small as well. Their aerodynamic3 design increases the car’s speed
capabilities. Their powerful engines often get fewer miles to the gallon4 than many other types
of cars. Be prepared to spend a little more money to get that perfect sports car and drive it
around! Sports cars are typically expensive to buy, cost more to insure,5 and require more gas.

1
suspension a system connecting the vehicle’s body to the wheels that reduces the effects of traveling over an
uneven surface
2
rear wheel drive type of car in which the engine powers the back wheels to make the car move
3
aerodynamic a quality that allows air to flow easily along the surface
4
miles to the gallon (miles per gallon) how many miles a car can run using one gallon (close to one liter) of
gasoline/petrol
5
insure to protect your automobile against damage or loss by making regular payments to a company that will pay
for the damage or loss if it happens

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sedans Label: _____

Sedans may be the most popular type of car in the world.

They are also called “passenger cars” because they are
designed with two rows of seats large enough for several
adults to sit comfortably. In a wide range of sizes from
compact1 to full-sized models, sedans typically have four
doors. The backseat is easily accessible through the two
rear doors. Sedans are equipped with enclosed2 trunks that can hold medium-sized cargo such
as suitcases and groceries. Both the front and back seats typically hold two or three people.
Sedans are known for their smooth ride and comfortable interiors. They come in luxury and
economy models, and everything in between, and are a great choice for people with either high
incomes or low budgets!
1
compact smaller than other cars of the same kind
2
enclosed covered so the space can be closed off

      273
 
Classic Cars Label: _____

Older cars are a piece of history driving down the road!

Classic cars often have elegant1 designs but lack many
basic safety features like seatbelts, automatic lights,
airbags, and modern brakes. Many classic cars have been
‘fixed-up’, or restored to their original condition. While
some restored cars can be expensive, you can also find
less expensive classic cars that need some work. But
beware because finding parts and renovating2 that
unique, classic car might be more difficult than you think!
1
 elegant graceful, sophisticated
2
 renovate to make changes and repairs so that it is back in good condition

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sports Utility Vehicles (SUV) Label: _____

This large vehicle has similarities to both a station wagon

and a truck, and has become a popular choice in recent
years. Like station wagons, Sport Utility Vehicles (or
SUVs) have large interiors and plentiful seating –
sometimes even three rows of seats! Like trucks, however,
they are much higher than many other vehicles and can
pull a trailer, boat, or other heavy cargo. Some SUVs are good for “off-road” driving, or driving
on rough, unpaved surfaces. As a heavy, four-wheel drive vehicle, many SUVs are easy to
maneuver in bad weather, such as snowy conditions when a vehicle might get stuck. But these
cars can be expensive, and they typically get very low gas mileage.1 Originally Sport Utility
Vehicles were designed for practical purposes and had very basic interiors. But today, their
growing popularity has led to the development of luxury2 SUVs with plush,3 roomy interiors.
1
gas mileage (miles per gallon), how many miles a car can run using one gallon of gasoline/petrol
2
luxury expensive and high-quality
plush comfortable, soft, high-quality  
3

      274
 
 Minivans Label: _____

Really, there’s nothing “mini” about most minivans! These

long, four-door vehicles are spacious on the inside with
lots of head room. With three rows of seating, seven or
eight adults can ride comfortably. It’s no surprise that
minivans are also called “people-movers” and are popular
choices for big families and taxi drivers! Large, sliding
doors on the sides of the vehicle make getting in and out
of minivans easier, and the seats can often be re-
arranged1 or even taken out so that oversized cargo can also be transported2 in minivans.
These vehicles have come a long way from their early beginnings, and now driving and riding in
a minivan is a smooth, enjoyable experience.

1
re-arranged placed in different areas or spots than the original
2
transported moved or taken to another location

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pick-Up Trucks Label: _____

Do you need to carry lots of large, heavy cargo? Do you

want to pull a boat or a trailer behind your vehicle? Pick-
up trucks, or just trucks, are great for these purposes.
Trucks come in lots of different sizes, but they all have an
enclosed1 cabin for carrying people, and an open area
for carrying cargo – the ‘bed’. Traditionally trucks have had just one row of seating and two
doors. This meant the only two or perhaps three people could ride safely in a truck at one time.
Nowadays, however, trucks come in ‘extended cab’ versions, where an additional row of seating
is included in the enclosed cabin area. (Sometimes there is even a second set of doors.) While
you may spend a lot of money on gas, insurance2 rates for trucks are often low.
1
enclosed covered, space can be closed off
2
insurance the agreement in which you pay a company money, and the company pays the cost if you have an
accident, injury, or loss  

      275
 
Note-taking Form

Paragraph 1: Sports Cars Paragraph 2: Sedans

Paragraph 3: Classic Cars Paragraph 4: Sport Utility Vehicles

Paragraph 5: Minivans Paragraph 6: Pick-Up Trucks

      276
 
 Hey, Little Minivan: Answer Keys

Mixed-Up Pictures: Answer Key

1. J. burn rubber
2. F. minivan
3. D. automatic tranny (transmission)
4. B. radio
5. I. gas
6. G. headlights
7. H. climate control
8. C. air bags
9. E. seats
10. A. sports car

Listening for Rhyming Words: Answer Key

line *starred pairs are near rhymes

1–2 down, hometown
3–4 gears, years
6–7 overdrive, 95 (ninety-five)
8–9 gas, class
10 – 11 day, USA
12 – 13 EFI, PSI (electronic fuel injection, pounds per square inch)
15 – 16 age, cage
17 – 18 heat, beat
19 – 20 *Reports, support
21 – 22 *insurance, deterrents
25 – 26 by, cry
27 – 28 pay, away
31 – 32 date, eight
33 – 34 park, dark
35 – 36 ‘Vettes (short for ‘corvettes’, a type of car), bets
37 – 38 sad, had
39 – 40 *minivan, again

      277
 
 Song 13: Further Down

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

Unscramble the Sentences

Stanza Creation
Can You See What I See?

LISTENING

Dictation
Mixed-Up Lyrics
Listening for Rhyming Words

SINGING

Old Song, New Song

One Theme – Many Songs
Crazy Lyrics

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: Small Group Discussion and Summary

Reading: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details
Writing: I Think This Song Rocks!

      278
 
Further Down: Lyrics
by Kris Gruen
(2:22)

1 It takes no time to begin again,

Just stay away from where you’ve been.
The moon will rise at a half past seven.
It takes no time to begin again.

5 And it takes no time to heal the past.

Just remember where your heart was last.
The sun sets early, but the moon she rises fast.
It takes no time to heal the past.

(Chorus):
9 And in this work we’re not alone.
The whole world is out to find
How to make the roses and violins sing their strings.
Move us further down the line,
Move us further down the line.

14 It takes no time to make a choice.

These marble steps will serve just fine.
Oh, show me courage, show me voice,
Like the wind inside the pine.
No, no, no, no, no, it’ll take no time.

(Chorus):
19 And in this work we’re not alone.
The whole world is out to find
How to make the roses and violins sing their strings.
Move us further down the line, (move us further down)
Move us further down the line,
Move us further down,
Move us further down,
Move us further down the line.

      279
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Unscramble the Sentences

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary and grammar for the song, and write
phrases and sentences

Level: All Time: 25 – 30 minutes, plus the length of the song (2:22 minutes)

Preparation and Materials: Make enough copies of the scrambled sentences (page 281) so
that each group has one sentence to unscramble. Make enough copies of the two challenge
sentences so that each group has one challenge sentence. (Answer key: see lines 1 – 8 of the
lyrics on page 279.)

Instructions: See page 13. Get the students to re-order the words to create complete
sentences; then re-order each line to form the first two stanzas of the song.

Stanza Creation

Purpose: To predict the content, generate interest, and introduce vocabulary for the song, and
write phrases and sentences

Level: 3 and above

Time: 30 – 40 minutes, plus the length of the song (2:22 mins.) (This activity may be extended
over several class sessions.)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following keywords from Stanza 1 on the board in
random order:
takes time begin again moon rise seven stay away

Instructions: See page 12.

Can You See What I See?

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 25 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the picture of the rearview mirror (page 282) on the board.
Cover the lines from the song with a piece of paper so that students cannot read them.

Instructions: See page 19, Modification A. Before making predictions, uncover the lines from
the song and ask students make predictions based on the picture and the lines.

      280
 
Further Down: Unscramble the Sentences

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

again begin It no takes time to

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

away been from Just stay where you’ve

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

a at half moon past rise seven The will

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

again begin It no takes time to

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

And heal it no past takes the time to

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

heal It no past takes the time to

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Challenge Sentences
*Note to the teacher: the second challenge sentence has an extra word (she) and it is
not Standard English, so you may need to give students a hint about this sentence.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

heart Just last remember, was where your

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

but early, fast moon rises sets she sun The the

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

      281
 
Further Down: Can You See What I See?

It takes no time to begin again.

Just stay away from where you’ve been.

      282
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Dictation

Purpose: To listen for details, and write phrases and sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 25 minutes (to play the song three times)

Preparation and Materials: (Answer key: see the lyrics on page 279.)

Instructions: See page 29.

Mixed-Up Lyrics

Purpose: To listen for specific words or phrases, and make print and sound connections

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 25 minutes (to play the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the handout (page 284) for each group of
students. Cut apart the lines and mix them up. (Answer key: see the song lyrics on page 279.)

Instructions: See page 27.

Listening for Rhyming Words

Purpose: To listen for details, and recognize and discriminate between similar sounds

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to the play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (page 279) for each student or pair of
students. Write the following words from the song on the board:

again past line choice

Instructions: See page 30. (Answer key: see page 290.)

      283
 
Further Down: Mixed-Up Lyrics

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
It takes no time to begin again,
Just stay away from where you’ve been.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The moon will rise at a half past seven.
It takes no time to begin again.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
And it takes no time to heal the past.
Just remember where your heart was last.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The sun sets early, but the moon she rises fast.
It takes no time to heal the past.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
And in this work we’re not alone.
The whole world is out to find
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
How to make the roses and violins sing their strings.
Move us further down the line,
Move us further down the line.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
It takes no time to make a choice
These marble steps will serve just fine.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oh, show me courage, show me voice,
Like the wind inside the pine.
No, no, no, no, no, it’ll take no time.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
And in this work we’re not alone.
The whole world is out to find
How to make the roses and violins sing their strings
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Move us further down the line (move us further down)
Move us further down the line
Move us further down
Move us further down
Move us further down the line
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

      284
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Old Song, New Song

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: 3 and above Time: 40 – 55 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (page 279) for each group of students,
or write the lyrics on the board.

Instructions: See page 39.

One Theme - Many Songs

Purpose: To create a song, and practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: 3 and above

Time: 60 – 75 minutes (depending on the number of songs to be performed; may be extended

over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions: See page 40, Modification C. Brainstorm words as a class about the following
topic that the students can use in a brainstorming session about the new song:

Moving forward to the next step in life.

Crazy Lyrics

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words, use different parts of speech, and think about why
words are appropriate and inappropriate in particular contexts.

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Crazy Lyrics handout (page 286) for each
group of students.

Instructions: See page 46.

      285
 
Further Down: Crazy Lyrics

Directions to Group Recorder: Do not show this handout to the rest of your group. You are going
to ask your group members to give you a word that fits the description in parentheses
underneath each line. Write down the word that your group members suggest. For example, if
you say, “Give me a noun for a thing,” and your group members reply, “sports car,” then write
“sports car” in the first blank. When you have filled in all the blanks, read or sing the new song to
your group.

It takes no __________________ to begin again

(noun – thing)

Just stay away from where you’ve been.

The moon will ________________ at a half past seven.

(verb – action)

It takes no time to _________________ again.

(verb – action)

And it takes no time to heal the ____________________.

(noun – thing)

Just remember where your __________________ was last.

(noun – thing)

The sun sets ________________, but the moon she rises fast.
(adverb)

It takes no time to _______________ the __________________.

(verb – action) (noun – thing)

And in this work we’re not ______________________.

(adjective – emotion)

The ________________ world is out to find

(adjective)

How to make the _____________ and _____________ sing their _______________.

(noun – thing) (noun – thing) (noun – thing)

Move us further down the __________________,

(noun – thing)

Move us further down the __________________.

(noun – thing)

      286
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: Small Group Discussion and Summary

Purpose: To think critically, and express opinions

Level: 3 and above Time: 25 – 35 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the discussion questions (page 288) for each
group.

Instructions: See page 53.

Reading: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details

Purpose: To write and answer questions that focus on main ideas and details

Level: 3 and above Time: 30 – 40 minutes in class (part of this activity for homework)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text (page 289) for each student. As
homework, assign each student to read the text and write either one main idea question or one
detail question.

Instructions: See page 59.

Writing: I Think This Song Rocks!

Purpose: To critically evaluate a piece of music, and write short, persuasive song reviews

Level: 3 and above Time: 40 – 50 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the song review handout (page 290) for each
group. Gather information about song reviews.

Instructions: See page 68. Use the following topics to help students brainstorm words to use
in their reviews:

Instruments heard in “Further Down”

Adjectives to describe the sound of the song and the singer’s voice
Emotions you feel when you hear this song

After the brainstorming session, give students the handout and have them write a review.

      287
 
Further Down: Small Group Discussion and Summary

1. What emotions do you feel when you listen to this song?

2. What is the musician trying to tell the audience?

3. When you listen to a song, do you apply it to your own life? Do you try to understand what is
going on in the songwriter’s own life? Why or why not?

4. Even if you don’t understand the lyrics, do you think the tune and the way the musician sings
will be understood all over the world? Why?

5. Do you think traditional songs in your culture are a form of poetry? Do these songs
sometimes have an artistic interpretation? Explain.

      288
 
 Music and Poetry

The song “Further Down” by musician Kris Gruen is an example of

how music is a type of poetry. But what is poetry? Poetry is not
always about telling a story. Rather, poetry is more focused on using
words to express a deeper meaning and convey1 emotions. The
rhythm that the poet chooses is also important. Poetry uses stressed
and unstressed syllables to create rhythm within verses, giving poetry
a music-like quality. This rhythm in poetry is similar to the beat found
in music.

Like poetry, music also expresses emotions through a musical and rhythmic language. The
words in songs are a type of poetry called lyric poetry. The purpose of lyric poetry is to express
personal feelings that are often unique2 to the poet. Lyric poetry is sometimes written in
response to a situation that the poet found meaningful or difficult. Like other types of poetry, lyric
poetry can be interpreted3 in many different ways, however. The meaning intended by the
songwriter is sometimes understood differently by each listener because of their unique life
experiences.

The song “Further Down” is an example of how lyrics have multiple interpretations.4 Musician
Kris Gruen sings:
It takes no time to begin again, Just stay away from where you’ve been
What does he mean when he sings these lyrics? One possible interpretation is that he was very
hurt in the past, maybe by someone he loved. In order to move forward from this, he must avoid
places or things that remind him of why his heart was broken. Do you have another
interpretation of his lyrics?

Often the words or ideas in a song or poem cannot be

interpreted literally.5 To interpret something literally
means to consider the real-world meaning of the
individual words. Instead, we try to find metaphors, or
symbols, that relate the ideas to a deeper message. For
example, Kris Gruen also sings:
The sun sets early, but the moon she rises fast

The literal meaning of these words talks about sunsets and moonrises, but what might be a
symbolic interpretation of these lyrics? One interpretation is that the day symbolizes6 positive
(or “light”) times in life, while the night symbolizes negative (or “dark”) times. Although the day
ends when the sun sets, the moon will quickly bring light into even the dark times in life.
Of course, there are other interpretations. For example, a second interpretation of this line is
that the day is too short and the night comes too quickly. How do you interpret these lyrics? It is
not necessary to determine one exact meaning when reading poetry or listening to music. It is
more important to find meaning in the forms of art that you can relate to your own life.
                                                                                                           
1
convey to express or communicate something
2
unique one of a kind, unlike others
3
interpret to understand or finding meaning in something
4
interpretation the different meanings or ways of understanding something
5
literally in a way that uses the ordinary and usual meaning of a word
6
symbolize to stand for or represent something

      289
 
Further Down: I Think This Song Rocks!

A review normally takes the following pattern:

• (Name of Singer’s) new song (Title) is (strong opinion).
• Four to six sentences to justify the writer’s opinion about the song; details about the
song’s characteristics, such as the lyrics, beat, rhythm, melody, instruments, vocals, and
so on.
• Concluding remark or prediction.

About Further Down

• Singer: Kris Gruen
• Instruments: acoustic guitar, violin, banjo, drums, bass, percussion
• Genre: Indie Folk

Your Review:

Further Down: Answer Keys

Listening for Rhyming Words: Answer Key

word *starred words are near rhymes, line numbers are (in parentheses)

again *begin (1), been (2), *seven (3), again (4)

past last (6), fast (7), past (8)
line *find (10, 20), line (12-13, 23, 26), fine (15), pine (17)

      290
 
 Song 14: Just Like Everyday People

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

Four Corners
Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary
How Many Questions in a Minute?

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Mixed-Up Pictures
Listening for Rhyming Words

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

Old Song, New Song
Crazy Lyrics

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: Silly Story

Reading: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details
Writing: Story Extensions

      291
 
Just Like Everyday People: Lyrics
by Kelli Heath
(4:12)

1 People fighting
Wrong and righting
People doing things just the way they think they oughta do
Making deals, sell themselves shorter than they got to
Crack the whip and a loving kick and
Make it to the top another day another hour another minute
7 But don’t keep me waiting if your heart isn’t in it.
When the tables turn, will you finally learn?
You gotta live. Just like everyday people.
You gotta give. When you know you just can’t win.
We’re getting ready to begin.
It’s easy out and easy in. I’m gonna need you as a friend.

13 See, we forget and we remember

Regret and get defensive
Go back the way we came
And every day the same mistake
Sit around the kitchen table
Learning how to fear our neighbors
And I can’t tell you why
21 Well I believe in… Says I don’t break even
Somebody suited for a better life.
And there ain’t no easy way around.
No quick and dirty way about it.
You gotta live, just like everyday people.
We got it good so you gotta give.
When you know you just can’t win.
28 We’re getting ready to begin.
It’s easy out and easy in. I’m gonna need you as a friend.

      292
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Four Corners

Purpose: To generate interest in the song, and express opinions and make choices about
controversial ideas/statements

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 25 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Label four corners or areas of the classroom with posters or signs
that say:
Strongly Agree Agree Disagree Strongly Disagree

Instructions: See  page 9, Modification A. Write the controversial statements (page 294) on the
board one at a time. After listening to the song, write the corresponding line from the song (page
294) next to each controversial statement and hold a follow-up discussion.

Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary

Purpose: To generate interest in the song, and activate background knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following line from the song on the board as the starting
point for brainstorming:
People fighting, wrong and righting

Instructions: See page 17.

How Many Questions in a Minute?

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, activate background
knowledge about the topic, and ask and answer questions

Level: 3 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the large picture of two people arguing and then
compromising (page 295) on the board.

Instructions: See page 23.

      293
 
Just Like Everyday People: Four Corners

Controversial Statement Corresponding Line from the Song

The most important opinion is your own. People doing things just the way they think
they oughta do

People should do whatever it takes to Crack the whip and a loving kick and make it
succeed, even if it means ignoring the needs to the top
of other people.

The worst mistake is the mistake that you Go back the way we came, and every day the
repeat. same mistake

The best accomplishments are those that are And there ain’t no easy way around, No quick
easy to achieve. and dirty way about it, You gotta live

Just Like Everyday People: Answer Keys

Listening for Rhyming Words: Answer Key

word *starred words are near rhymes, line numbers are (in parentheses)

fighting righting (2), doing (3), making (4), loving (5), waiting (7), getting (11,
28), learning (19)
minute in it (7), it (24)
turn learn (8)
win begin (11, 28), in (12, 21, 29), *friend (13, 30), even (21)

      294
 
Just Like Everyday People: How Many Questions in a Minute?

      295
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song.

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following three discussion questions on the board, or
create your own:
1. What does the person singing the song tell us about himself?
2. Is this person happy or sad? Why do you think so?
3. When would you enjoy listening to this song?
Instructions: See page 27.

Mixed-Up Pictures

Purpose: To listen for specific phrases

Level: All Time: 20 – 25 minutes (to play the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following common phrases from the song on the board
in random order. Put a letter under each phrase: A, B, C, and so on. Many of these phrases are
idiomatic, so you may need to explain what these phrase means (indicated to the right below).
(Answer key: see order below.)
1. sell themselves short to lack confidence in their abilities
2. crack the whip to push people to do more or better
3. make it to the top to succeed at something
4. keep me waiting to be behind schedule
5. your heart isn’t in it you don’t really want to do something
6. the tables turn the situation changes or reverses
7. break even to neither gain nor lose anything
8. quick and dirty to do something the quick and easy way, not the best way

Instructions: See page 28, Modification B. Ask students to number their papers 1 – 8.

Listening for Rhyming Words

Purpose: To listen for details; and recognize and discriminate between similar sounds
Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the song lyrics (page 292) for each student or pair
of students. Write the following words from the song on the board:
fighting minute turn win
Instructions: See page 30. (Answer key: page 294.)

      296
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to sing the song one or two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the lyrics (page 292) on the board or on a large poster.

Instructions: See page 38.

Old Song, New Song

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: 2 and above Time: 40 – 55 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (page 292) for each group of students.

Instructions: See page 39.

Crazy Lyrics

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words, use different parts of speech, and think about why
words are appropriate or inappropriate in particular contexts

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Crazy Lyrics handout (page 298) for each
group of students.

Instructions: See page 46.

      297
 
Just Like Everyday People: Crazy Lyrics

Directions for Group Recorder: Do not show this handout to the rest of your group. You are
going to ask your group members to give you a word that fits the description in parentheses
underneath each line. Write down the word that your group members suggest. For example, if
you say, “Give me an action verb ending in –ing,” and your group members reply, “baking,” then
write “baking” in the first blank. When you have filled in all the blanks, read or sing the new song
to your group.

People ___________________, Wrong and righting

(-ing action verb)

People doing things just the way they think they oughta do

Making ___________________, sell themselves shorter than they got to

(plural noun)

Crack the ___________________ and a ___________________kick and

(singular noun) (adjective)

Make it to the top another day another hour another minute

But don’t keep me waiting if your ___________________ isn’t in it.

(singular noun)

When the tables turn, will you ___________________ ___________________?

(adverb) (verb)

You gotta ___________________. Just like everyday ___________________.

(verb) (plural noun)

You gotta ___________________. When you know you just can’t win.
(verb)

We’re getting ready to ___________________.

(verb)

It’s easy out and easy in. I’m gonna need you as a _______________.
(singular noun)

      298
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: Silly Story

Purpose: To tell stories, and practice using new vocabulary in sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of Silly Story words cards (page 300) for each group.

Instructions: See page 54.

Reading: Main Ideas and/or Specific Details

Purpose: To write and answer questions that focus on main ideas and details

Level: 3 and above Time: 30 – 40 minutes in class (Part of this activity is homework.)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text (page 301) for each student. As
homework, assign each student to read the text and write either one main idea question or one
detail question.

Instructions: See page 59.

Writing: Story Extensions

Purpose: To write creative narratives

Level: 2 and above Time: 45 – 55 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (page 292) for each group of students,
or write the lyrics on the board.

Instructions: See page 70.

      299
 
Just Like Everyday People: Silly Story

people forget neighbors regret

wait tell kitchen friend

mistake table whip fear

learn turn begin crack

remember kick defensive need

      300
 
 Everyday People

Kelli Heath describes the world as she sees it in her song Just Like Everyday People—a world
of unhappy people struggling to compete with each other and make it to the top. But the musical
style does not express the ideas of struggle and competition. If she wanted the music to reflect
struggle and competition, she might have chosen a faster style
of music and instruments that can produce louder, harsher
sounds, such as an electric guitar or a keyboard. Instead the
slower pace and soothing,1 thoughtful melody of Heath’s song
make listeners reflect on the struggle and how to overcome it,
not feel the struggle through the music. The lyrics encourage
listeners to give up the struggle, be friends, and live ‘just like
everyday people.’

But who are America’s everyday people? And where do they live? Many live in the large cities
that you have probably heard of: New York City, Los Angeles, Miami, and Chicago. Yet there
are many more small cities where “everyday people” also live. Cities in the United States are
often rated or labeled “the best cities to live in” based on characteristics that many Americans
value, such as the quality of the school system, the cost of living,2 crime rates,3 culture,
diversity,4 available activities, and weather. Although these cities aren’t as well-known as the
cities mentioned above, each has qualities that may appeal to many people.

Based on one website, Eden Prairie, Minnesota (population 64,000) was

rated the best, family-friendly place to live in the United States in 2010.
Most people think of Minnesota, which borders Canada, as a place with
long, cold winters and lots of snow. But there is more in Eden Prairie than
snow. Other factors that contributed to the positive rating were the
number of jobs, the quality of education, many activities for kids, a range
of outdoor activities (like swimming and hiking), not much traffic, low
pollution, and a low crime rate. Overall, Eden Prairie came out on top.

Located across the

country in the eastern
state of Maryland,
Ellicott City (population 155,000) was also
rated highly. Despite being known for its
heavy traffic, qualities that contributed to its
high rating included a beautiful historical
district (with the oldest railroad station in the
United States and the home of one of the
signers of the Declaration of

                                                                                                           
1
soothing producing feelings of comfort or relief
2
cost of living the amount of money that is required in a particular area or society to pay for the basic things that
people need (such as food, clothing, and housing)
3
crime rate the number of crimes reported to the police in the area
4
diversity having people of different cultures, races, religious beliefs, and backgrounds in a group or community  

      301
 
Independence), coffee shops, antique5 shops, and small locally owned boutiques.6 In addition,
the city has lots of parks, a strong economy and job market, and affordable housing. Ellicott City
has many of the benefits of a smaller city, while still being very close to the large urban centers
of Washington, D.C. and Baltimore, Maryland.

All around the country, everyday people live in cities like Eden Prairie and Ellicott City, each with
their own qualities and strengths.

                                                                                                           
5
antique belonging to an earlier period, style, or fashion : old and often valuable
6
boutique a small store that sells stylish clothing or other usually expensive things
 

      302
 
 Song 15: The Time Is Now

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

Picture Dictation
Stanza Creation
What Do You Know About…?

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Song Bingo
Did You Hear What I Heard?

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

Your Moves
One Theme – Many Songs

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: Act the Part

Reading: Reading Groups
Writing: Guest Musicians / Speakers

      303
 
The Time Is Now: Lyrics
by Travis Haddix
(4:41)

1 If there was a time

Our society needs fairer weather
It’s now. Oh, right now.
If there was a time,
We should get our act together
It’s now. Oh, right now.

7 I used to say I don’t need nobody but me,

But today with that statement I disagree.
If there was a time we need love,
It’s now.

11 If there ever was a time,

We should help each other
It’s now. Oh, right now.
If there ever was a time,
We should behave as brothers,
It’s now. Oh, right now.
All for one man, and one for all,
Together we stand, but divided we fall.
If there ever was a time, we need love
It’s now.

21 If there ever was a time,

We should be friends,
It’s now. Oh, right now.
If there ever was a time,
This violence should end,
It’s now. Oh, right now.
People are fighting, all over this world,
Men and women are dying, boys and girls.
If there ever was a time,
Oh, we need love, oh, it’s right now.
Oh, right now.

      304
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Picture Dictation

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, activate background
knowledge about the topic, and recognize prepositions

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the picture of two girls climbing a mountain (page 306) on
the board. Cover the line from the song with a piece of paper so that students cannot read it.

Instructions: See page 22. After completing the picture dictation, uncover the line from the
song and have students make predictions based on the picture and the line.

Stanza Creation

Purpose: To predict the content, generate interest, and introduce vocabulary for the song, and
write phrases and sentences

Level: 3 and above

Time: 30 – 40 minutes, plus the length of the song (4:41 mins.) (This activity may be extended
over several class sessions.)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following keywords from the fourth stanza on the board
in random order:
dying end fighting love time need
now time violence world

Instructions: See page 12.

What Do You Know About…?

Purpose: To generate interest in the song, and activate background knowledge about blues
music and instrument

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the quiz (page 307) for each group of students.
(Answer key: page 313.)

Instructions: See page 16. Tell students that the quiz is about the style of music called blues.

      305
 
The Time Is Now: Picture Dictation

Together we stand, but

divided we fall.

      306
 
The Time Is Now: What Do You Know About…?

We are going to listen to a song called The Time Is Now, performed by Travis Haddix. This song
is an example of a style of music called the blues. Answer the following questions:

True or False? All About the Blues

Decide if each statement below is true or false.

1. The Blues is a new style of music that has developed in the last 20 years.
true false

2. Blues music often has a melancholic, or sad, melody.

true false

3. Blues music often has a message of determination and optimism despite the sad melody.
true false

Typical Instruments Used in Blues Music

The following instruments are often used in blues music, and you’ll be able to hear many of
them in the song. Can you match the instrument with its name?

A. drums B. piano C. harmonica D. trumpet E. saxophone F. electric guitar

4. _________ 5. ________ 6. ________ 7. ________ 8. ________ 9. ________

      307
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following three discussion questions on the board or
create your own:
Does it seem like a happy or a sad song?
What line is repeated throughout the song?
Why do you think the songwriter chose to use a specific word/expression multiple
times?

Instructions: See page 27.

Song Bingo

Purpose: To listen for specific words, introduce vocabulary from the song, and make print and
sound connections

Level: All Time: 15 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following words from the song on the board:
behave brothers divide dying end fair fall fighting
friends help love need now society stand time
together violence weather world

Instructions: See page 33.

Did You Hear What I Heard?

Purpose: To listen for main ideas and specific details

Level: Level 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song one or two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following questions on the board:

What are two things that the singer is not happy with?
What are two things the singer says we need or should do?
When does the singer think people need to take action?

Instructions: See page 34. (Answer key: page 313.)

      308
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to sing the song one or two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the lyrics (page 304) on the board or on a large poster.

Instructions: See page 38.

Your Moves

Purpose: To learn vocabulary from the song, and represent word meanings with actions

Level: All Time: 20 – 30 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the lyrics (page 304) for each student, or write
them on the board. Circle the following words and phrases each time they occur in the lyrics:
right now disagree love help time

Instructions: See page 42.

One Theme – Many Songs

Purpose: To create a song, and practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: 3 and above

Time: 60 – 75 minutes (depending on the number of songs to be performed, this activity may be
extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions: See page 40.

      309
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: Act the Part

Purpose: To think critically and express opinions

Level: Intermediate and above Time: 25 - 35 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make enough copies of the role-play cards (page 311) so that
each student has one role. Use the following scenario:
One of you is a bus driver, and the rest of you are passengers on the bus. An
argument occurs because you each have your own issues and problems. Then the
bus crashes, and all of you are trapped inside. You must work together to get out of
the bus.

Instructions: See page 52. Divide students into groups of five.

Reading: Reading Groups

Purpose: To practice reading comprehension skills, conduct research, think critically, and
collaborate as part of a team

Level: 3 and above

Time: 60 – 75 minutes in class (10 – 25 minutes for groups to prepare their paragraphs, plus
50 minutes to go through the text as a class)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text (page 312) for each group.

Instructions: See page 64, Modification A. Divide students into three groups and assign each
group the following paragraphs.
Group 1: Paragraphs 1 – 2 Group 2: Paragraph 3 Group 3: Paragraph 4

Writing: Guest Musicians / Speakers

Purpose: To generate interest in community service, host a guest in the classroom, and write
invitations and thank-you letters

Level: 3 and above Time: 120 – 170 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Identify and contact a local community leader who has been active
in community service. Prepare sample invitation and thank-you letters (models are included in
Part I of this book).

Instructions: See page 71. Ask each student to write an invitation to the speaker to come and
talk about ways people can cooperate in the local community.

      310
 
The Time is Now: Act the Part

The Bus Driver

You are working extra hours because your replacement did not show up on time for work.
Working late is making you miss your child’s sporting event and has made you very unhappy
and cranky with the passengers. You are in a hurry to finish the route and nearly drive right past
Passenger #2, who has arrived late at the bus stop.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Passenger #1
You are a young, healthy teenager sitting near the front of the bus. When elderly Passenger #4
gets on the bus, you do not offer him/her your seat. When Passenger #4 passes you, he/she
steps on your foot.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Passenger #2
You are walking to the bus stop when you see the bus coming. You begin to run so that you will
not miss the bus, but the bus driver does not slow down or wait for you. You chase after the bus
and finally the driver stops to let you on. You are angry at the bus driver for not waiting for you.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Passenger #3
You are a business person on your way to a job interview. When Passenger #4 passes you,
he/she spills a drink on you, leaving a large stain on your pants. You are angry and concerned
about going to your interview with messy clothes.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Passenger #4
You are an elderly man/woman who walks with a cane. You get on the bus after Passenger #2.
When you get on the bus, the closest seat is taken by Passenger #1, who does not offer it to
you. You accidently step on Passenger #1’s foot as you try to pass. This makes you trip and
spill your drink on Passenger #3, who becomes angry with you.

      311
 
 Community Spirit in America

“Our society needs fairer weather”

- Travis Haddix, The Time is Now

Think about the weather line above from the blues7 The Time is Now. What do you think the
singer means by “fairer” weather? Do you think he is talking about the actual climate? Or could
he mean something more?

Perhaps ‘weather’ is a symbol for relationships between

people in society. By calling for fairer weather, the singer
suggests that we need to calm “stormy” relationships
between individuals in society. In a storm the wind blows
in all directions, and the rain beats against the ground.
The overall picture is messy and disorganized. Nothing is
accomplished until fair weather returns. When the storm
is over, the sun comes out, and rebuilding can begin.

The lyrics of the song suggest that now is the time to

begin rebuilding society by working together. However, the idea of neighbors working together
for the common good is not new in America. In fact, the founders of the United States included
farmers who worked hard to help each other and to build communities. Especially in times of
crisis,8 farmers help each other to maintain their families, property, crops, and animals. Natural
disasters, such as storms, bring out the community spirit among farmers.

Today Americans continue to come together in times of need.

For example, on May 22, 2011, a catastrophic tornado9 hit the
town of Joplin, Missouri. Nearly 8,000 homes, churches, schools,
and businesses were destroyed or severely damaged, leaving
thousands of families homeless, hundreds of people injured, and
more than 150 people dead. But now the people in the town have
come together to rebuild the city. And they aren’t doing it alone:
people all around the United States have donated money, non-
perishable10 food, household items, and other supplies. Many
others have volunteered their time and labor to clear away the
debris11 and begin to rebuild. Despite the tragedy in Joplin,
residents are not singing the blues. Instead, they are moving
tornado
forward together.

                                                                                                           
7
blues a style of music that often has sad melodies and lyrics that was created by African Americans
8
crisis a difficult or dangerous situation that needs serious attention
9
tornado a violent and destructive storm in which powerful winds move around a central point
10
nonperishable able to be stored for a long time before being eaten or used
11
debris the pieces that are left after something has been destroyed  

      312
 
 The Time Is Now: Answer Keys

What Do You Know About…? Answer Key

1. False. Blues music originated among African American communities in the late 1800s.
2. True.
3. True. The sound of the music often seems contradictory to the message. Blues music often
offers a positive message about a sad theme.
4. D. trumpet
5. E. saxophone
6. F. electric guitar
7. A. drums
8. B. piano
9. C. harmonica

Did You Hear What I Heard? Answer Key

1. violence, people fighting, people dying,

2. we need fairer weather, love. We should get our act together (get organized), help each
other, behave as brothers, be friends, and end the violence.
3. right now
 

      313
 
 Song 16: Peace

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

One Title, Several Words – Many Possibilities

Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary
It Could Be / There Might Be

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Mixed-Up Lyrics
Musical Words

SINGING

Show Me the Word

Drum and Instrument Circles
Disappearing Song

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: Silly Story

Reading: A Range of Questions
Writing: Paragraph Posters

314
 
Peace: Lyrics
by Chen Lo
(3:29)

(yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah)

1 People across the world, stand up don’t be ignored.
Let ‘em know just what you want PEACE and nothing more.
We gotta break these walls, divided just because
What really makes us strong, PEACE to one and all.
What are we fighting for? Who’s going to stop the wars?
Apply a different force, PEACE is what we want.
They say the globe is warm, it’s causing all the storms.
A lot of nature lost, PEACE before it’s gone.
PEACE is but a dream, something most us have never seen.
10 A word we like to say, but people don’t really know what it means.
They’re spilling blood for oil, whatever’s valuable.
The ones who want the biggest PIECE don’t share at all.
These banks are getting more, people are losing homes.
They better give the poor a PIECE and maybe more.
These cops are on us hard, making and breaking laws.
No justice there will be no PEACE, ‘cause that’s the call.
These streets are living raw, like they don’t care at all.
Come on, you got to put your PIECES on the floor.
PEACE across the world, something we can no longer ignore.
20 Why do we sell our souls for the price of life and war?
Because of ‘44, they say the hate is gone.
It never left the core, PEACE to right the wrong.
They say we came a long way where we started from.
I’m asking where we’re going, PEACE even beyond.
We gotta be the spark to get us out the dark.
We all can play a part, PEACE, when will it start?
Say is it possible, or just impossible?
We gotta choose it y’all ‘cause PEACE ain’t optional.
PEACE around the world, something much easier said than done.
30 What will you sacrifice, to make PEACE for everyone?

315
 
31 This is a freedom song. Will we all get along?
Maybe if we’re dropping PEACE instead of bombs.
They say it’s time for change, or will it stay the same?
Can we at least just have a PIECE to play the game?
What are we leaving for the babies yet unborn?
I know before I’m gone PEACE is what I’m working on.
We’re running out time, let’s not get left behind.
Get yours ‘cause I’mma get my PIECE, PIECE, MY PIECE OF MIND.
If everyday we strive for PEACE, I believe we will defeat
The craziness in this world.
Taking full responsibility, not blaming you or me, somebody has to be strong.
If everyday we strive for PEACE, I believe we will defeat
The craziness in this world.
Taking full responsibility, not blaming you or me, somebody has to stand tall.
45 PEACE, tell them what you want
PEACE, everybody needs
PEACE, everybody screams
PEACE, tell them what you want
PEACE, everybody needs
PEACE, everybody wants
PEACE, everybody needs
PEACE, everybody screams
53 PEACE

316
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

One Title, Several Words – Many Possibilities

Purpose: To predict the content, generate interest, and introduce vocabulary for the song

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes, plus the length of the song (3:29 mins.)

Preparation and Materials: Write the title of the song on the board.

Instructions: See page 10. After the initial round of predictions, write the following words on
the board and have students make new predictions:
world freedom dream life sacrifice

Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the picture of the peace symbol (page 318) on the board as
the starting point for brainstorming.

Instructions: See page 17, Modification D. If students have trouble getting started, you can
write peace next to the picture.

It Could Be / There Might Be

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, and activate background
knowledge about the topic

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Hang the picture of the dove and olive branch (page 319) on the
board. Cover the picture with five or six strips of plain paper so that the students cannot see the
picture.

Instructions: See page 20.

317
 
Peace: Brainstorming and Mind-Mapping Vocabulary

318
 
Peace: It Could Be / There Might Be

319
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following three discussion questions on the board or
create your own:
Does it seem to be a serious or a humorous song?
Does the song remind you of any other songs you know?
Do you like the song? Why or why not?

Instructions: See page 27.

Mixed-Up Lyrics

Purpose: To listen for specific words or phrases, and make print and sound connections

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 25 minutes (to play the song two or three 3 times)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the handout (pages 321-322) for each group of
students. Cut apart the lines and mix them up. (Answer key: see the lyrics on pages 315-316.)

Instructions: See page 27.

Musical Words

Purpose: To listen for and write specific words or phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Stop the song at the places on the CD suggested below or choose
your own. Optional: make a copy of the lyrics (pages 315-316) for each student or group of
students.

Instructions: See page 32. Stop the song after the following sections (see the song lyrics on
pages 315-316):
Section 1: lines 1 – 10 (0:00 – 0:53)
Section 2: lines 11 – 20 (0:54 – 1:36)
Section 3: lines 21 – 30 (1:37 – 2:17)
Section 4: lines 31 – 38 (2:17 – 2:44)
Section 5: lines 39 – 53 (2:44 – end)

320
 
Peace: Mixed-Up Lyrics

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
People across the world, stand up don’t be ignored.
Let ‘em know just what you want PEACE and nothing more.
We gotta break these walls, divided just because
What really makes us strong, PEACE to one and all.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
What are we fighting for? Who’s going to stop the wars?
Apply a different force, PEACE is what we want.
They say the globe is warm, it’s causing all the storms.
A lot of nature lost, PEACE before it’s gone.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peace is but a dream, something most us have never seen.
A word we like to say, but people don’t really know what it means.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
They’re spilling blood for oil, whatever’s valuable.
The ones who want the biggest PIECE don’t share at all.
These banks are getting more, people are losing homes.
They better give the poor a PIECE and maybe more.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
These cops are on us hard, making and breaking laws.
No justice there will be no PEACE, ‘cause that’s the call.
These streets are living raw, like they don’t care at all.
Come on, you got to put your PIECES on the floor.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PEACE across the world, something we can no longer ignore.
Why do we sell our souls for the price of life and war?
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Because of ‘44, they say the hate is gone.
It never left the core, PEACE to right the wrong.
They say we came a long way where we started from.
I’m asking where we going, PEACE even beyond.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
We gotta be the spark to get us out the dark.
We all can play a part, PEACE, when will it start?
Say, is it possible, or just impossible?
We gotta choose it y’all ‘cause PEACE ain’t optional.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PEACE around the world, something much easier said than done.
What will you sacrifice, to make PEACE for everyone?
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This is a freedom song. Will we all get along?
Maybe if we’re dropping PEACE instead of bombs.
They say it’s time for change, or will it stay the same?
Can we at least just have a PIECE to play the game?
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

321
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

What are we leaving for the babies yet unborn?

I know before I’m gone PEACE is what I’m working on.
We’re running out time, let’s not get left behind
Get yours ‘cause I’mma get my PIECE, PIECE, MY PIECE OF MIND.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
If everyday we strive for PEACE, I believe we will defeat
The craziness in this world.
Taking full responsibility, not blaming you or me somebody has to be strong.
If everyday we strive for PEACE, I believe we will defeat
The craziness in this world.
Taking full responsibility, not blaming you or me, somebody has to stand tall.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PEACE, tell them what you want
PEACE, everybody needs
PEACE, everybody screams
PEACE, tell them what you want
PEACE, everybody needs
PEACE, everybody wants
PEACE, everybody needs
PEACE, everybody screams
PEACE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

322
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Show Me the Word

Purpose: To make print and sound connections, and learn the vocabulary from the song

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare pieces of paper or cards for students to write on. Write
the following words on the board in random order:
want strong wars peace warm storms lost dream
word people valuable share give homes laws justice
streets floor world spark dark possible optional
song time responsibility craziness

Instructions: See page 41.

Drum and Instrument Circles

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: All Time: 20 – 30 minutes (to sing the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Collect and bring in different types of drums or instruments. If you
cannot do this, then students can clap their hands or tap on the desks.

Instructions: See page 43.

Disappearing Song

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation, and recall words and phrases

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes (to sing the song four times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the song lyrics (pages 315-316) on the board.

Instructions: See page 38. Stop after Step 4 (when 50% of the words remain).

323
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: Silly Story

Purpose: To tell stories, and practice using new vocabulary in sentences

Level: 2 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the Silly Story word cards (page 325) for each
group of students.

Instructions: See page 54, Modification B.

Reading: A Range of Questions

Purpose: To read for factual details, combine, infer, evaluate, and reflect on information in a
reading text

Level: 2 and above Time: 20 – 30 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text and questions (pages 326-327)
for each student.

Instructions: See page 58, Modification D.

Writing: Paragraph Posters

Purpose: To write cohesive paragraphs about peace, and represent ideas visually

Level: 2 and above Time: 100 – 130 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a descriptive paragraph as a model for students.

(Optional) Gather crayons or markers, old magazines, glue, and poster paper.

Instructions: See page 69, Modification A. Have students write a descriptive paragraph about
the following topic:
Ways to promote peace in the world

324
 
Peace: Silly Story

responsibility walls ignore

fight strong babies

dream justice oil

freedom bombs life

war hate love

325
 
 The Quest for Peace

Our civilization has seen a great number of achievements that have made our lives better. For
example, the development of writing has allowed us to benefit from the experiences and
knowledge of those who came before us. The laws and governments created by our ancestors
have helped us to live together in society. Antibiotics were developed to fight diseases and
infections that previously led to many deaths. After all this time, however, there is still one thing
that we have not managed to achieve: peace. But what does peace mean? In the song Peace,
artist Chen Lo sings that:

Peace is but a dream, something most of us have never seen

A word we like to say, but people don’t really know what it means

The word peace can have several meanings. Perhaps the most common meaning is related to a
period of time with no wars or fighting. In the late 1960s, some people were unhappy with the
United States’s involvement in overseas wars, among other things. The group known as
“hippies,” dreamed of peace and social freedom. They even used a gesture
to represent the word peace: holding up two fingers in the shape of a “V”
with the palm facing outward.

Peace can also have a broader, more general meaning, however. Peace
can mean a state in which people experience mutual1 harmony,2 have little
stress, and avoid arguments and fighting. This type of peace may refer to
the relationships among individuals or groups not just between nations.

The desire for peace seems to be a universal3 concern, and

many different symbols have been adopted to signify4 the
call for peace. We mentioned the “V” gesture above, but what
other symbols for peace do you know? For example, hippies (and even people
today!) often have worn another symbol on their clothing and jewelry to indicate
peace, which is pictured to the right. Can you find this symbol in the picture of the
hippie above?

Another symbol used around the world to represent peace is a dove, sometimes
holding an olive branch. In the United States, many people wear or display ribbons
of different colors to show their support and build awareness for a cause. Can you
guess what color of ribbon is used to represent peace?

Throughout history, many individuals, movements, institutions, and even

musicians have expressed their desire for a more peaceful world, both in the
common meaning of the word and also in its broader meaning. The lyrics of
songs in musical movements like rap and hip-hop are often political and contain
critical views and opinions about societies, governments, and organizations.
Chen Lo is an artist who is known for using his music to express such views. It’s
clear that Chen Lo is calling for peace in this song, but which meaning do you think Chen Lo
intends? Which lines from the song Peace support your opinion?

                                                                                                           
1
mutual shared between two or more people  
2
harmony getting along well with each other  
3
universal existing or true at all times or in all places  
4
signify mean, show, indicate  

326
 
Peace: A Range of Questions

Question 1: What is the most common meaning for the word peace? (focusing)

Question 2: What is the meaning of the word peace in a broad sense? How different is this
meaning of the word peace from the most common meaning? (combining)

Question 3: Why do you think the hand sign (V) for peace became popular in many countries
around the world? Give possible reasons and explain your answer. (inferring)

Question 4: Do you believe that the creation of a hand sign (V) for peace has a strong effect
on people around the world? How so? (evaluating)

Question 5: If you were the president of your country, what actions would you take to create a
peaceful environment there for both yourself and your compatriots? (relating)

327
 
 Song 17: Supertalents

ACTIVITY MENU

PRE-LISTENING

One Title, Several Words – Many Possibilities

Swat
Find Someone Who…

LISTENING

Relax and Enjoy!

Did You Hear What I Heard?
Song Bingo

SINGING

Sing Along With Me

One Theme – Many Songs
Drum and Instrument Circles

POST-LISTENING

Speaking: What Do YOU Think?

Reading: A Range of Questions
Writing: Paragraph Posters

      328
 
Supertalents: Lyrics

by Mista Cookie Jar & the Chocolate Chips, featuring Gregory Brown
(2:48)

1 Children! ever stop and think why you’re put up on this planet?
Each baby in the world born with a gift of God's good magic.
Each got a puzzle piece in they life, you just got to got to grab it.
Practice till that gift of goodness comin’ auto-automatic,
Make it so they understand it's all part of the plan.
You and I, we so valiant
We keep the world in balance with our gift of supertalents.
Tell everybody don't panic. Combine our powers sit back.
Watch God. Handle it. Tell your friends
(Chorus):
10 If you can walk, you can dance. (if you can walk, you can dance)
If you can talk, then you can sing. (if you can talk, you can sing)
Everybody's born with a beautiful gift.
Now that ya know ain't that a beautiful thing?
(You better know it’s something beautiful)

15 It doesn't matter what they think,

Doesn't matter what they say
What only matters is the time that ya give in everyday.
Little by little baby steps get ya moving
Day by day keep on improving
Moving mountains in such da slightest way.
Try to keep the possibilities open, always in motion,
Always seekin’ love
‘Cause where there's love, there is a pathway.
Feel it with your heart. Let your mind and soul follow.
Seek tomorrow. Every day's a new day.
So just try to stay in shape.
(Chorus:)
27 ‘Cause if ya walk, you can dance. (and if you walk, you can dance)
If you can talk, then you can sing. (and if you talk, you can sing)
Everybody's born with a beautiful gift.
Now that ya know, ain't that a beautiful thing?
It's such a beautiful thing...

      329
 
32 (Boys and girls: Allow me to introduce my gypsy twin brother, Mr. Gregory Brown)

33 Aren't ya gettin' tired of seeing wasted potential

Buildin' up into nothing, diggin’ atcha to ya very know-how?
It'll amount to nothin' more than a can o’ beans in this world
If ya never finally follow your true passion held in store now.
So why'd ya get one for the gipper?
Shouldn't you deliver something for the children
That are whisperin' into your ears?
You better notice that you’re standing in the shadow,
But just would ya look at all this light!
You're shinin' at ‘em bright and clear.
43 Only up to you ‘cause only you can fully truly
Put your heart into if it is what you really wanna do.
Whatcha gotta do instead of flyin' the coop,
Legitimately get the scoop.
Evaluate your passion so ya sew your seeds.
Then eat your fruits... of your labor.
Go ahead and savor.
You've resisted the law of resistance,
Now look at what's on the table.
It's your potential staring straight in your face.
Quite amazingly I'm saying it's deliciously true.
(Chorus):
54 If ya can walk, you can dance. (if you can walk, you can dance)
If you can talk, you can sing. (if you can talk, you can sing)
Everybody's born with a beautiful gift.
Now that ya know, ain't that a beautiful thing?

58 If ya can walk, you can dance. (if you can walk, you can dance)
If you can talk, you can sing. (if you can talk, you can sing)
Everybody's born with a beautiful gift.
Now that ya know, ain't that a beautiful thing?
It's such a beautiful thing.
You better know, it’s such a beautiful thing.

      330
 
Pre-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

One Title, Several Words – Many Possibilities

Purpose: To predict the content, generate interest, and introduce vocabulary for the song

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes, plus the length of the song (2:48 mins.)

Preparation and Materials: Write the title of the song on the board.

Instructions: See page 10. After the initial round of predictions, write the following words on
the board and have students make new predictions:
gift practice powers potential balance

Swat

Purpose: To introduce vocabulary from the song, make print and sound connections, and
discriminate between similar sounds

Level: All Time: 15 – 20 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Prepare a flyswatter or rolled-up newspaper for each team. Write
the following words on the board in random order:
walk talk stop top baby maybe understand sand
power flower dance chance gift lift plan man say day
sing thing born horn time climb

Instructions: See page 11, Modification A.

Find Someone Who…

Purpose: To generate interest and introduce vocabulary for the song, activate background
knowledge about the topic, and ask and answer questions

Level: 3 and above Time: 30 minutes, plus the length of the song (2:48 mins.)

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the questions (page 332) for each student or
group of students, or write the questions on the board.

Instructions: See page 14.

      331
 
Supertalents: Find Someone Who…

Directions: Walk around the classroom asking your classmates questions. Use the topics below
to form questions using the following question patterns:
• Can you…?,
• Do you…?, or
• Have you ever…?

If a classmate answers ‘Yes’ then write his or her name in the space. If he or she answers ‘No’
then do not write anything. Try to find a different person for each space. Do not use the same
name twice.

Find someone who...

__________________...can sing well

__________________...knows how to play the guitar

__________________...has won a prize in a sports competition

__________________...knows how to set up a tent

__________________...has done a traditional dance performance

__________________...can bake a delicious cake

__________________...knows how to sew

__________________...exercises more than three times a week to stay in shape

__________________...has written a poem or a short story

__________________...can speak more than two languages

__________________...has taken care of a stray animal

__________________...knows how to play chess

      332
 
Listening Activities: Choose one of the listening activities below.

Relax and Enjoy!

Purpose: To enjoy listening to the song

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Write the following three discussion questions on the board or
create your own:
Does it seem like a happy or a sad song? What do the people singing the song tell
us about themselves? Do you like the song? Why or why not?

Instructions: See page 27.

Did You Hear What I Heard?

Purpose: To listen for main ideas and specific details

Level: 3 and above Time: 15 – 20 minutes (to play the song one or two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following questions on the board:

What can you do if you can walk?
What can you do if you can talk?
What is everyone born with?
What message are the singers trying to tell us?

Instructions: See page 34. (Answer key: page 338.)

Song Bingo

Purpose: To listen for specific words and phrases, introduce vocabulary from the song, and
make print and sound connections

Level: All Time: 15 minutes (to play the song two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the following words from the song on the board in random
order:
think planet baby gift magic puzzle plan world
balance supertalents powers beautiful born love heart
mind soul potential passion notice shadow seeds fruits

Instructions: See page 33.

      333
 
Singing Activities: Choose one of the singing activities below.

Sing Along With Me

Purpose: To practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: All Time: 10 – 15 minutes (to sing the song one or two times)

Preparation and Materials: Write the lyrics for the chorus (pages 329-330, lines 10 – 14 and
27 – 30) on the board or on a large poster two times. Note: you will write the chorus twice
because there are slight word changes the second time it is sung.

Instructions: See page 38, Modifications B and C. Get two students ready to lead the song by
pointing to the words on the board. Each of them will lead one group in singing the chorus (two
times). Divide students into two groups. Group 1 will sing all of the regular lines in the chorus,
and Group 2 will sing all of the words/lines that are in parentheses. For example, in lines 13-14:
Group 1 sings: Now that ya know, ain’t that a beautiful thing?
Group 2 sings: (You better know it’s something beautiful)

One Theme – Many Songs

Purpose: To create a song, and practice pronunciation and intonation

Level: 3 and above

Time: 60 – 75 minutes (depending on the number of songs to be performed; this activity may
be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: None

Instructions: See page 40, Modification C. Brainstorm words as a class about the following
topic, and then have students use these words in their new song:
Encouragement and inspiration to do what you’re good at

Drum and Instrument Circles

Purpose: To explore the rhythm of words

Level: All Time: 20 – 25 minutes (to go through the song two or three times)

Preparation and Materials: Collect and bring in different types of drums. If you cannot do this,
then students can clap their hands or tap on the desks.

Instructions: See page 43.

      334
 
Post-listening Activities: Choose one or two of the activities below.

Speaking: What Do YOU Think?

Purpose: To ask and answer questions, and summarize and present information

Level: 2 and above Time: 25 – 35 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Pre-teach the concept of surveys and their results: the purpose of
a survey, types of questions, and how to calculate and present results.

Instructions: See page 50, Modification C. Use the following questions for the survey:
What is your favorite hobby?
What is something that you are good at?
How many hours a week do you spend on your interests?
Do you like to sing?
Do you like to dance?
Do you agree that everyone has their own special talent?

Reading: A Range of Questions

Purpose: To read for factual details, combine, infer, evaluate, and reflect on information in a
reading text

Level: 2 and above Time: 30 – 40 minutes

Preparation and Materials: Make a copy of the reading text and questions (pages 336-337)
for each student.

Instructions: See page 58, Modification D.

Writing: Paragraph Posters

Purpose: To write cohesive paragraphs, and represent ideas visually

Level: 2 and above

Time: 100 – 130 minutes (may be extended over several class sessions)

Preparation and Materials: Have the paragraph (page 338) ready as a model for the students.
(Optional) Gather crayons or markers, old magazines, glue, and poster paper.

Instructions: See page 69. Ask students to write a descriptive paragraph about the following
topic:
Qualities needed to be a good __________ (students can choose an occupation)

      335
 
 Multiple Intelligences

“Supertalents” is an inspiring and encouraging song. The group Mista Cookie Jar and the
Chocolate Chips, along with guest artist Gregory Brown, sing that every person is born with a
unique gift or talent, which he or she should practice and use every day. According to the song,
everyone is good at something!

Of course, this idea is not new. Howard Gardner, an American developmental psychologist and
professor at Harvard University, developed a theory of multiple intelligences in the 1980s.
According to this theory, there are at least eight types of intelligence. Individuals think about
things in different ways. These different intelligences affect people’s learning, memory,
thoughts, and interests. As a result, different people are good at different things.

1. Verbal-linguistic intelligence: This intelligence governs the ability

to use language and words. Linguistically intelligent people are able
to listen to, speak, read, and write well in one or more languages and
they tend to conceptualize5 thoughts using words rather than
pictures.

2. Logical-mathematical intelligence: This intelligence controls the

ability to use logic, numbers, and scientific reasoning. People who
have logical-mathematical intelligence ask lots of questions and like
to make connections among pieces of information.

3. Visual-spatial intelligence: People with visual-spatial intelligence

like to visualize 6their thoughts in pictures and hold information in
their minds in the form of images. They can also navigate well
through unfamiliar spaces.

4. Musical intelligence: Musically intelligent people are perceptive7

and responsive to sounds, rhythms, tones, and patterns. They are
often involved in producing music.

5. Bodily-kinesthetic intelligence: This type of intelligence regards

the control of body movements and the expression of ideas
through movements. People with this intelligence have good hand-
eye coordination and sense of balance. They learn best by doing
and actively interacting with their surroundings.

6. Interpersonal8 intelligence: People possessing this type of

intelligence have the ability to relate to and empathize with other
people. They perceive other people’s feelings and moods, while at
the same time, they communicate well with others.

                                                                                                           
5
conceptualize to form (an idea, picture, etc.) of something in your mind  
6
visualize to form a mental picture of (someone or something), imagine  
7
perceptive able to notice something easily  
8
interpersonal relating to or involving relations between people  

      336
 
 7. Intrapersonal intelligence: People with intrapersonal9 intelligence are able to reflect
on their own feelings and the inner workings of their minds and hearts. They like to
analyze themselves by recognizing their personal strengths and weaknesses.

8. Naturalistic intelligence: The eighth type of intelligence refers to the ability to take care
of the natural environment and recognize the objects that are in it.

Gardner and other supporters of the multiple intelligences theory are still considering if there are
other intelligences to add to the typology. Mista Cookie Jar believes everyone is born with a
unique gift or talent. We just have to find it and make use of it every day!

Supertalents: A Range of Questions

Question 1: How many types of intelligence are currently in the Gardner theory of multiple
intelligences? (focusing)

Question 2: Can you think of suitable jobs or occupations for each type of intelligence?
(inferring)

Question 3: Can you think of some other intelligences that might be added to the theory of
multiple intelligences? (evaluating)

Question 4: Which of these intelligences do you think you possess? Which ones do you wish
you had? (relating)

                                                                                                           
9
intrapersonal within a person  

      337
 
Supertalents: Paragraph Posters
Model Descriptive Paragraph – Qualities needed to be a good teacher

A good teacher needs to have at least three qualities: patience, a clear delivery, and knowledge
of the subject. First of all, a teacher often has to care for a large number of students every day.
Students may be noisy, have trouble concentrating in class, or may need to have information
explained many time. Therefore, a good teacher has to be calm and patient. A good teacher
should also be able to speak clearly and loudly so that every student in the classroom can hear
what is being said. Clear delivery is necessary for students’ comprehension of knowledge. Most
important, a good teacher should have a thorough understanding of his or her subject area so
that students can learn the most up-to-date and useful knowledge. Being knowledgeable allows
the teacher to answer students’ questions. Although teaching is not an easy task, a person with
these three qualities will be on his or her way to being a good teacher.

Supertalents: Answer Keys

Did You Hear What I Heard? Answer Key

1. dance
2. sing
3. a beautiful gift
4. that everyone has their own special talents
 

      338